0452 PP With Ms
0452 PP With Ms
ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice February/March 2022
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
Write in soft pencil.
Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
Do not use correction fluid.
Do not write on any bar codes.
You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
The total mark for this paper is 35.
Each correct answer will score one mark.
Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
IB22 03_0452_12/4RP
© UCLES 2022 [Turn over
2
A appropriation account
B cash book
C income statement
D statement of financial position
3 Fatima required additional finance for her business and borrowed funds from Ali. This was
deposited into the business bank account.
4 On 1 March, a business owed its suppliers $9500. During March, the following transactions took
place.
A credit note
B debit note
C invoice
D statement of account
7 Jacob settled the account of Ahmed, a credit supplier. He made the following entries on the credit
side of his cash book.
Ahmed 5 195
Which entries did Jacob make on the debit side of Ahmed’s account?
A bank 195
B bank 200
C bank 195
discount allowed 5
D bank 195
discount received 5
8 The total of the debit column of a trial balance was more than the total of the credit column.
A cash
B discount received
C drawings
D irrecoverable debts
debit credit
$ $
Samir 40
Samuel 40
A A cheque for $420 received from a customer was debited to his account.
B Discounts allowed, $420, was debited twice in the discounts allowed account.
C Goods costing $420, taken by the owner of the business for own use, were credited to his
drawings account.
D Rent received, $420, was credited twice in the rent receivable account.
11 A trader calculated her profit for the year at $14 800. The following errors were then discovered.
12 Jack’s cash book showed an overdrawn balance at bank of $2600. Comparing the cash book
with the bank statement, it was discovered that direct debits of $200 had not yet been recorded
by Jack. He then updated his cash book.
A $2400 credit
B $2400 debit
C $2800 credit
D $2800 debit
A cash discount
B contra entry
C interest on overdue account
D provision for doubtful debts
What was the balance on his purchases ledger control account on 1 June?
16 On the last day of the financial year, Khalid purchased office fittings, $900. This was incorrectly
recorded as office expenses, $90.
A overstated by $810
B overstated by $990
C understated by $90
D understated by $900
17 Aggie is a trader. She uses the following methods of depreciation for different types of
non-current asset.
On 1 January year 1, Aggie purchased small items of equipment costing a total of $2400 and
fittings costing $8000.
On 31 December year 2, Aggie estimated that the equipment was worth 70% of its original cost.
The statement of financial position showed the net book value of equipment as $1680 and fittings
as $4800.
equipment fittings
Abeo bought machinery for $40 000 on 1 January year 1. He charges depreciation on machinery
at 20% per annum using the reducing balance method. Depreciation is charged in the year of
purchase but not in the year of disposal.
Which journal entry records the profit or loss on disposal of the machine?
debit credit
$ $
19 Why would a business record the amount owing by a credit customer as an irrecoverable debt?
20 Anji maintains a provision for doubtful debts at 5% of the trade receivables at the end of each
financial year. At the start of the financial year, the trade receivables were $2000. At the end of
the financial year, the trade receivables were $4500.
Which entry would be made in the income statement for the financial year?
A $125 as an expense
B $125 as an income
C $325 as an expense
D $325 as an income
1 furniture store
2 insurance company
3 newsagent
4 toy shop
5 window-cleaner
23 A trader bought a machine for use in the business. He paid a part of the cost in cash and agreed
to pay the remaining part in 15 months’ time.
In addition to the non-current assets, which items in the statement of financial position will
increase as a result of this transaction?
A
B
C
D
25 James is a partner in a business. He made a loan to the business and received loan interest.
What is the double entry in the books of the partnership for the loan interest James has received?
debit credit
26 A limited company whose capital consisted of ordinary shares ceased trading and was not able to
pay its debts.
A Shareholders would have to pay a proportion of the debt based on the number of shares
owned.
B Shareholders would have to pay a proportion of the debt based on the value of shares
owned.
C Shareholders would have to sell their personal possessions to pay the debts of the company.
D Shareholders would lose the money that was paid when the shares were first purchased.
On that date, the company issued 500 000 $1 shares. Shareholders were asked to pay 60% of
the cost immediately, with the remainder being payable by 1 June 2022.
By 1 August 2021, all shareholders had paid what was due at that date.
28 There are 120 members of a sports club. The annual subscription is $60.
At the beginning of the year, no members had paid in advance and no members had
subscriptions outstanding.
At the end of the year, 7 members had not paid and 3 members had paid in advance.
Which amount was shown for subscriptions in the income and expenditure account?
A 1 and 2 only
B 1 and 3 only
C 1, 2 and 3 only
D 1, 2, 3 and 4
During year 2, his long-term loan increased by $3000 and his net current assets decreased by
$1000. Depreciation for the year was $500.
$ $
revenue 12 800
opening inventory 1 000
purchases 10 500
11 500
closing inventory 1 600 9 900
gross profit 2 900
32 A trader provided the following information for the year ended 31 December.
total cash and credit purchases of goods for re-sale 150 000
cash purchases of goods for re-sale 17 000
credit purchases of non-current assets 25 000
A 17 days
B 20 days
C 22 days
D 24 days
33 A trader decided to reduce her level of inventory in order to reduce the storage costs.
How did this affect profit for the year and the rate of inventory turnover?
A decreased decreased
B decreased increased
C increased decreased
D increased increased
34 Azim and Bashir are both sole traders. They provided the following information.
Azim Bashir
$ $
profit for the year ended 31 December before interest 17 200 15 000
long-term loan at 31 December – 12 500
capital at 31 December 86 000 25 000
A double Bashir’s
B half of Bashir’s
C one-third of Bashir’s
D three times Bashir’s
35 Stephanie’s major competitor has invested in a new machine for making goods more cheaply.
Stephanie knows this will affect her sales but did not record this in her accounting records.
A going concern
B materiality
C money measurement
D prudence
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 12 February/March 2022
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the February/March 2022 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.
1 B 1
2 A 1
3 A 1
4 C 1
5 A 1
6 D 1
7 D 1
8 B 1
9 D 1
10 A 1
11 B 1
12 C 1
13 C 1
14 B 1
15 B 1
16 C 1
17 C 1
18 D 1
19 A 1
20 A 1
21 B 1
22 A 1
23 D 1
24 C 1
25 B 1
26 D 1
27 B 1
28 C 1
29 B 1
30 D 1
31 A 1
32 C 1
33 D 1
34 B 1
35 C 1
ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper February/March 2022
1 hour 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
DC (CJ) 303841/3
© UCLES 2022 [Turn over
2
1 Nazmeen started in business as a hairdresser on 1 January 2022. She purchases her hairdressing
supplies on credit and uses the imprest system for her petty cash.
REQUIRED
(a) (i) Prepare the general journal entry to record the opening assets and liabilities at
1 January 2022. A narrative is required.
Nazmeen
General journal
Date Details $ $
[4]
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
Nazmeen makes all payments of less than $100 by petty cash. The imprest amount, which is
$200, is restored on the first day of each month from the bank account.
REQUIRED
(b) (i) Complete Nazmeen’s petty cash book on the following page.
Balance the petty cash book, bring down the balance on 1 February 2022 and restore
the imprest.
© UCLES 2022 0452/22/F/M/22
Nazmeen
Petty Cash Book
Total Date Details Total Motor Sundry Ledger
© UCLES 2022
received paid expenses expenses accounts
$ $ $ $
$
2022
0452/22/F/M/22
...................... ...................... ........................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................
[10]
[Turn over
4
(ii) State one advantage of using the imprest system for petty cash.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
REQUIRED
(c) Complete the table below by placing a tick (3) to indicate which document(s) each item
appears on. The first one is completed for you.
[Total: 20]
BLANK PAGE
2021 $
1 February Sales ledger control account debit balance 12 510
Sales ledger control account credit balance 1 245
2022
31 January Totals for the year:
Credit sales 134 000
Cash sales 4 625
Bank transfers received from credit customers 96 250
Cash received from credit customers 12 890
Returns from credit customers 4 000
Irrecoverable debts written off 9 100
Contra entries 1 677
Discount allowed 4 643
Discount received 2 119
Interest charged on overdue sales ledger accounts 1 104
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare Ravi’s sales ledger control account for the year ended 31 January 2022.
Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 February 2022.
Ravi
Sales ledger control account
Date Details $ Date Details $
[10]
(b) State the accounting principle which is being applied when irrecoverable debts are written off.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Explain why the following interested parties want to know the level of Ravi’s trade receivables.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
Ravi sends out statements of account to credit customers and charges interest on overdue
accounts. He is concerned about the loss caused to his business by irrecoverable debts. He is
considering employing a part-time credit controller to contact credit customers by telephone and
to start legal action on overdue accounts if necessary. The credit controller would be paid $6800
per annum.
REQUIRED
(d) Advise Ravi whether or not he should employ the credit controller. Justify your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
$
Inventory at 1 January 2021
Raw materials 6 100
Work in progress 9 420
Finished goods 11 350
Revenue 230 020
Purchases of raw materials 84 200
Wages
Factory operatives 33 000
Factory supervisor 26 000
Office and sales staff 45 000
Rates and insurance 14 000
General factory expenses 11 500
Factory equipment – at cost 100 000
Factory equipment – provision for depreciation 36 000
Additional information
2. Rates and insurance are to be apportioned equally between the factory and the office.
4. Factory equipment is depreciated at 20% per annum using the reducing balance method.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare Pari’s manufacturing account for the year ended 31 December 2021.
Pari
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 31 December 2021
$ $
[9]
(b) Prepare Pari’s income statement (trading section) for the year ended 31 December 2021.
Pari
Income Statement (trading section) for the year ended 31 December 2021
$ $
[4]
(c) Calculate Pari’s gross margin. Your answer should be correct to two decimal places.
Gross margin
working answer
[2]
Pari is disappointed in her cost of production and gross profit. She is considering buying in her
products instead of producing them in her factory.
REQUIRED
(d) Advise Pari whether or not she should start to buy in her products. Justify your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
Demis
Trial balance at 31 December 2021
Debit Credit
$ $
Sales 90 052
Purchases 52 420
Purchases 52 420
Rates and insurance 11 500
General expenses 1 092
Property 92 500
Fixtures at cost 34 000
Provision for depreciation of fixtures 21 760
Trade receivables 7 410
Trade payables 4 665
Inventory 9 600
Cash at bank 8 095
Capital at 1 January 2021 109 940
Drawings 11 320
Suspense 60 770
283 772 283 772
Additional information
2. The value of inventory on 31 December 2021 was included in the trial balance.
The inventory valuation had increased by 20% since 31 December 2020.
REQUIRED
Demis
Corrected Trial Balance at 31 December 2021
Debit Credit
$ $
______________ ______________
______________ ______________
[6]
Demis has received a bank statement which shows that there were unpresented cheques of $437
at 31 December 2021. There were no outstanding lodgements.
REQUIRED
(b) Calculate the bank balance shown on the bank statement at 31 December 2021. Indicate
whether this balance is a debit or a credit balance.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
1 Drawings of goods for own use, $317, had been omitted from the books of account.
3 A payment for property insurance, $500, had been debited to the property account.
5 A credit sale, $191, to Harvinder, had been debited to the sales account and credited to
Harvinder’s account.
REQUIRED
(c) Complete the following table to show the entries required to correct each error.
[10]
(d) Identify the following error types from the table above.
(i) error 2
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) error 4
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 20]
5 Priti and Paisley are in partnership renting out properties. Paisley manages the office and
maintains the bookkeeping records for the partnership.
$
Capital accounts at 1 February 2021
Priti 100 000
Paisley 20 000
Current accounts at 1 February 2021
Priti 7 932 credit
Paisley 2 350 credit
Drawings for the year ended 31 January 2022
Priti 15 000
Paisley 13 000
The profit for the year ended 31 January 2022 was $33 100.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the appropriation account for Priti and Paisley for the year ended 31 January 2022.
[6]
(b) Prepare Paisley’s current account for the year ended 31 January 2022. Balance the account
and bring down the balance on 1 February 2022.
Paisley
Current account
Date Details $ Date Details $
[6]
(c) Suggest three reasons why Paisley may not be satisfied with his overall share of the profit for
the year to 31 January 2022.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
Priti and Paisley are planning to purchase more properties to rent out. They are considering
forming a limited company as they believe this would make it easier for them to raise the finance
for the purchase of the properties.
REQUIRED
(d) Advise Priti and Paisley whether or not they should form a limited company.
Justify your answer with two advantages and two disadvantages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 February/March 2022
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the February/March 2022 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.
These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.
Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.
Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.
Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).
Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.
a DO credit answers which are worded differently from the mark scheme if they clearly convey the same meaning (unless the mark
scheme requires a specific term)
b DO credit alternative answers/examples which are not written in the mark scheme if they are correct
c DO credit answers where candidates give more than one correct answer in one prompt/numbered/scaffolded space where extended
writing is required rather than list-type answers. For example, questions that require n reasons (e.g. State two reasons …).
d DO NOT credit answers simply for using a ‘key term’ unless that is all that is required. (Check for evidence it is understood and not used
wrongly.)
e DO NOT credit answers which are obviously self-contradicting or trying to cover all possibilities
f DO NOT give further credit for what is effectively repetition of a correct point already credited unless the language itself is being tested.
This applies equally to ‘mirror statements’ (i.e. polluted/not polluted).
g DO NOT require spellings to be correct, unless this is part of the test. However spellings of syllabus terms must allow for clear and
unambiguous separation from other syllabus terms with which they may be confused (e.g. Corrasion/Corrosion)
4 Annotation:
• For point marking, ticks can be used to indicate correct answers and crosses can be used to indicate wrong answers. There is no direct
relationship between ticks and marks. Ticks have no defined meaning for levels of response marking.
• For levels of response marking, the level awarded should be annotated on the script.
• Other annotations will be used by examiners as agreed during standardisation, and the meaning will be understood by all examiners
who marked that paper.
1(a)(i) Nazmeen 4
General Journal
Debit Credit
Date Details
$ $
2022
Jan 1 Motor vehicle 11 000 }
Bank 2 300 } (1)
Petty cash 200 }
Bank loan 2 500 (1)
Capital 11 000 (1)
13 500 13 500
Assets, liabilities and capital at this date (1)
Max (1)
Accept other valid points
1(b)(i) Nazmeen 10
Petty Cash Book
Total Total Motor Sundry Ledger
received Date Details paid expenses expenses accounts
$ $ $ $ $
2022
200 Jan 1 Balance (1)
3 Petrol (1) 35 35
8 Magazines (1) 14 14
17 GL Limited (1) 60 60
26 Cleaning (1) 9 9
29 Alim (1) 38 38
156 44 14 98
31 Balance c/d 44
200 200
+ (1) dates
(1)OF totalling analysis columns
1(c) 4
Invoice Credit note Statement of
account
A credit purchase
2(a) Ravi 10
Sales ledger control account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2021 2021
Feb 1 Balance b/d 12 510* Feb 1 Balance b/d (1) both 1 245*
2022 2022
Jan 31 Sales (1) 134 000 Jan 31 Bank (1) 96 250
Interest charged (1) 1 104 Cash (1) 12 890
Sales returns (1) 4 000
Irrecoverable debts (1) 9 100
Contra entries (1) 1 677
Discount allowed (1) 4 643
Balance c/d 17 809
2022 147 614 147 614
Feb 1 Balance b/d (1)OF 17 809
(1) *for both opening balances
Max (2)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Accept other valid points
Recommendation (1)
3(a) Pari 9
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 31 December 2021
3(b) Pari 4
Income Statement (trading section) for the year ended 31 December 2021
$ $
Revenue 230 020
Cost of sales
Opening inventory of finished goods 11 350 *
Cost of production 173 795 (1)OF
185 145
Less Closing inventory of finished goods 12 630 * 172 515 (1)OF
Gross profit 57 505 (1)OF
*(1) for both inventories of finished goods
3(c) 100 2
Gross margin = 57 505 OF × } whole formula (1)OF = 25.00% (1)OF
230 020 1
3(d) 5
Advantages Disadvantages
May be cheaper to buy rather than to May be cheaper to make rather than to
make buy (1)
If could buy at lower cost than making If could make at lower cost than making
gross margin/gross profit would improve gross margin/gross profit would improve (1)
Would have more time for other business
functions e.g. marketing (1)
Accounting records would be simpler (1)
Cost of purchased finished goods may
increase in the future (1)
Depend on supplier for regular supplies (1)
Depend on supplier for quality (1)
Depend on supplier for required quantity (1)
May lose customer loyalty (1)
May be difficult to start production again
once stopped (1)
4(a) Demis 6
Corrected Trial Balance at 31 December 2021
Debit Credit
$ $
Sales 90 052
Purchases 52 420 (1)
Rates and insurance 11 500
General expenses 1 092
Property 92 500
Fixtures at cost 34 000
Provision for depreciation of fixtures 21 760
Trade receivables 7 410
Trade payables 4 665 (1)
Inventory 8 000 (2)CF
(1)OF
Cash at bank 8 095
Capital at 1 January 2021 109 940
Drawings 11 320
Petty cash 80 (1)
226 417 226 417
4(b) $ 2
Cash book balance 8 095 OF
Add unpresented cheques 437
Bank statement balance 8 532 (1) OF Credit (1)
4(c) 10
Error Entries required to correct the error
Debit Credit
Account $ Account $
1 Drawings of goods for own Drawings 317 (1) Purchases 317 (1)
use, $317, had been
omitted from the books of
account.
3 A payment for property Rates and 500 (1) Property 500 (1)
insurance, $500, had been insurance
debited to the property
account.
$ $
Profit for the year 33 100
Add Interest on drawings Priti 750 (1)
Paisley 650 (1) 1 400
34 500
Less Interest on capital Priti 4 000 (1)
Paisley 800 (1)
4 800
5(b) Paisley 6
Current account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2022 2021
Jan 31 Drawings (1) 13 000 Feb 1 Balance b/d 2 350
Interest on drawings (1)OF 650 2022
Balance c/d 1 425 Jan 31 Interest on capital (1)OF 800
Salary (1) 6 000
Profit share (1)OF 5 925
15 075 15 075
2022
Feb 1 Balance b/d (1)OF 1 425
5(d) Advantages 5
Limited liability/ a company is a separate legal entity (1)
Can raise more finance (1)
More options for raising finance (1)
Different ways of raising finance are available ordinary/preference shares and debentures/loans (1)
Or other relevant advantages
Max (2)
Disadvantages
Costly to establish (1)
More complex/regulated accounting required/have to publish accounts/more legal requirements (1)
May lose control of the business (1)
Decisions may take longer (1)
Dividends have to be paid to shareholders/have to share profit with shareholders (1)
Max (2)
Or other relevant disadvantages
Recommendation (1)
ACCOUNTING 0452/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice October/November 2021
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
Write in soft pencil.
Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
Do not use correction fluid.
Do not write on any bar codes.
You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
The total mark for this paper is 35.
Each correct answer will score one mark.
Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
IB21 11_0452_11/FP
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2
2 Hassan is a trader. During the financial year he took goods from the business for his own use.
debit credit
A drawings inventory
B drawings purchases
C income statement inventory
D income statement purchases
A purchases journal
B purchases ledger
C sales journal
D sales ledger
4 Which document does a trader issue to remind a credit customer that payment is due?
A credit note
B debit note
C receipt
D statement of account
6 Farouk sells goods on credit. A cheque from Khalid, a credit customer, was dishonoured by the
bank.
A bank Khalid
B irrecoverable debts Khalid
C Khalid bank
D Khalid irrecoverable debts
A credit customer purchased 20 units and paid the debt within 15 days.
account to account to
be debited be credited
A bank purchases
B purchases bank
C purchases trade payable
D trade payable purchases
10 At the end of each year, PT Limited transfers 20% of the profit for the year to the general reserve.
Draft financial statements were prepared for the year ended 30 September 2021. It was then
discovered that the inventory at 30 September 2021 had been overstated by $1500.
Which effects did the correction of this error have on retained earnings and general reserve at
30 September 2021?
11 The bank columns in a trader’s cash book and the bank statement both showed positive
balances. A comparison revealed the following differences.
What was the difference between the balance shown in the bank column of the cash book and
that shown on the bank statement?
A The cash book balance was $190 higher than the bank statement balance.
B The cash book balance was $190 lower than the bank statement balance.
C The cash book balance was $210 higher than the bank statement balance.
D The cash book balance was $210 lower than the bank statement balance.
13 Two companies each purchased a motor vehicle for $10 000 at the beginning of year 1. Company
G used the straight-line method of depreciation at a rate of 15% per annum, while Company H
used the reducing balance method at a rate of 20% per annum.
What was the difference in the depreciation charge between the two companies for year 2?
14 Amit’s financial year ends on 31 December. The following account appeared in his sales ledger.
Dipak account
2020 $ 2020 $
A an irrecoverable debt
B discount allowed
C the balance carried down
D the recovery of a debt previously written off
15 Sally wished to increase the balance on the provision for doubtful debts account at the end of the
financial year.
debit credit
16 The following errors were found after a statement of financial position had been prepared.
1 A loan repayable in two year’s time had been included as a current liability.
2 A provision for doubtful debts should have been created.
19 Anwar is a sole trader making annual profits of $24 000. He decides to admit Dilip as a partner.
They agree that Anwar would receive a salary, and profits and losses would be shared equally.
The forecast appropriation account for the partnership’s first year of trading is:
20 Kasi and Ravi are in partnership. The financial statements for the year ended 31 August 2021
showed that Ravi was entitled to interest on capital and interest on loan and was charged interest
on drawings.
A
B
C
D
Retained earnings were $86 000 on 1 September 2020 and $88 500 on 31 August 2021.
The company made a profit during the year of $26 000 and made a transfer to general reserve of
$5000.
What was the total ordinary share dividend paid during the year?
23 A sports club was formed on 1 August 2020. During the year ended 31 July 2021 the club
purchased equipment costing $5000, paying by cheque.
A
B
C
D
A raw material
B royalties
C wages of factory supervisors
D wages of production workers
25 The value of Thato’s work in progress increased during the year. This was recorded in his
financial statements.
How did this affect the cost of production and the cost of sales?
cost of
cost of sales
production
A decreased decreased
B decreased no effect
C increased increased
D increased no effect
1 January 31 December
net assets $28 000 $24 000
A $1000 loss
B $1000 profit
C $7000 loss
D $7000 profit
28 Roshan’s sales for his first year of trading were $55 000. His gross profit margin was 20%. The
closing inventory was $3200.
29 Which information is required to calculate the return on capital employed for a sole trader?
A current ratio
B liquid (acid test) ratio
C return on capital employed
D working capital
31 A trader provided the following information for the year ended 31 May 2021.
What was the trade payables turnover (days) for the year ended 31 May 2021?
Year 1 40%
Year 2 38%
Year 3 35%
35 What does the objective of understandability assume users of financial statements will possess?
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/11
Paper 1 October/November 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2021 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.
1 D 1
2 B 1
3 B 1
4 D 1
5 C 1
6 C 1
7 B 1
8 B 1
9 C 1
10 B 1
11 C 1
12 D 1
13 B 1
14 A 1
15 A 1
16 A 1
17 D 1
18 A 1
19 B 1
20 C 1
21 D 1
22 A 1
23 B 1
24 C 1
25 A 1
26 D 1
27 A 1
28 D 1
29 C 1
30 B 1
31 C 1
32 D 1
33 C 1
34 A 1
35 A 1
ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice October/November 2021
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
Write in soft pencil.
Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
Do not use correction fluid.
Do not write on any bar codes.
You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
The total mark for this paper is 35.
Each correct answer will score one mark.
Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
IB21 11_0452_12/2RP
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2
A The accountant prepares the trial balance and the book-keeper prepares the financial
statements.
B The accountant writes up the journals and the book-keeper writes up the ledger accounts.
C The book-keeper writes up the journals and the accountant prepares the trial balance.
D The book-keeper writes up the ledger accounts and the accountant prepares the financial
statements.
4 During her first financial year, a trader paid $1800 for insurance and $3200 for rent.
At the end of the financial year, she transferred insurance of $1500 and rent of $3600 to the
income statement.
What do the balances remaining on the accounts at the end of the financial year represent?
5 Leah bought goods, $8000, less 15% trade discount. She later returned half of these goods as
they were faulty.
Which document did Leah issue to the supplier for the returned goods?
7 Farouk sells goods on credit. A cheque from Khalid, a credit customer, was dishonoured by the
bank.
A bank Khalid
B irrecoverable debts Khalid
C Khalid bank
D Khalid irrecoverable debts
B At any time petty cash vouchers plus the petty cash balance are equal to the imprest
amount.
C The chief cashier is not asked continually for small sums of money.
D The number of entries in the cash book increases because of the large number of small cash
payments.
10 A sales invoice for $800 was incorrectly recorded in the sales journal as $1800.
A The trial balance balanced but both totals were overstated by $1000.
B The trial balance balanced but both totals were understated by $1000.
C The trial balance did not balance because the credits were overstated by $1000.
D The trial balance did not balance because the debits were understated by $1000.
11 A standing order paid for rent has not been entered into the accounting records of a business.
A Because the payment was made automatically, no additional entries are required in the
accounting records.
B Because the payment was made automatically, only an entry in the rent account is required.
C Entries are required in the cash book and in the bank reconciliation statement.
D Entries are required in the cash book and in the nominal (general) ledger.
12 The bank statement of a business had a credit balance of $2690 on 1 October 2021. At that date
cheques totalling $850 had not yet been presented for payment.
What was the bank balance in the cash book on 1 October 2021?
A $1840 credit
B $1840 debit
C $3540 credit
D $3540 debit
14 Two companies each purchased a motor vehicle for $10 000 at the beginning of year 1. Company
G used the straight-line method of depreciation at a rate of 15% per annum, while Company H
used the reducing balance method at a rate of 20% per annum.
What was the difference in the depreciation charge between the two companies for year 2?
15 At the end of the financial year Mui had prepaid rent of $1500.
A credit $1500 in the rent account and carry down as a credit balance
B credit $1500 in the rent account and carry down as a debit balance
C debit $1500 in the rent account and carry down as a credit balance
D debit $1500 in the rent account and carry down as a debit balance
16 After preparing draft financial statements at the end of her first year of trading, Lucy discovered
two errors.
1 Damaged inventory had been valued at cost price, $340. It was expected to sell
for $180.
2 100 items which had been expected to sell for $12 each had been valued at their
cost price of $7 each. Carriage inwards of $1 for each item had not been included in
the cost.
A overstated $60
B overstated $240
C understated $60
D understated $240
advantage disadvantage
18 What is shown in the capital and liabilities section of a statement of financial position of a
business?
20 A sole trader paid off the business’s overdraft using his own personal funds.
21 Hassin found that he needed help to run his business. He decided to take a partner rather than
employ an assistant.
1 An assistant would not interfere with how the shop was run.
2 An assistant would not share risk.
3 A partner would introduce some additional capital.
4 A partner would take a share of the profit.
22 Anwar is a sole trader making annual profits of $24 000. He decides to admit Dilip as a partner.
They agree that Anwar would receive a salary, and profits and losses would be shared equally.
The forecast appropriation account for the partnership’s first year of trading is:
Retained earnings were $86 000 on 1 September 2020 and $88 500 on 31 August 2021.
The company made a profit during the year of $26 000 and made a transfer to general reserve of
$5000.
What was the total ordinary share dividend paid during the year?
25 A sports club was formed on 1 August 2020. During the year ended 31 July 2021 the club
purchased equipment costing $5000, paying by cheque.
A
B
C
D
26 A sports club has 100 members and the annual subscription is $60.
12 members paid their outstanding subscription from the previous financial year
10 members paid their subscription in advance for the following financial year.
On 31 August 2021, subscriptions for the current financial year were still outstanding from
8 members.
What was the total amount received from members during the year ended 31 August 2021?
1 January 31 December
net assets $28 000 $24 000
A $1000 loss
B $1000 profit
C $7000 loss
D $7000 profit
28 Roshan’s sales for his first year of trading were $55 000. His gross profit margin was 20%. The
closing inventory was $3200.
29 Which information is required to calculate the return on capital employed for a sole trader?
A current ratio
B liquid (acid test) ratio
C return on capital employed
D working capital
Year 1 40%
Year 2 38%
Year 3 35%
32 Sam and Rob each own a trading business. The income of each business is solely from the sale
of goods. They provided the following information for the year ended 30 June 2020.
Sam Rob
33 Why would the owner of a business want to see his financial statements at the end of the year?
34 Charlie is a car dealer. Joe wanted a new car and went to Charlie’s car showroom.
On Monday Joe took a car for a test drive and decided to buy it.
On which day was Charlie able to account for the profit on the sale?
A Monday
B Tuesday
C Wednesday
D Thursday
35 Which accounting objective requires that financial information is provided in time for a decision to
be made?
A comparability
B relevance
C reliability
D understandability
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 October/November 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2021 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.
1 D 1
2 C 1
3 C 1
4 C 1
5 B 1
6 A 1
7 C 1
8 B 1
9 D 1
10 A 1
11 D 1
12 B 1
13 C 1
14 B 1
15 B 1
16 A 1
17 A 1
18 D 1
19 D 1
20 C 1
21 C 1
22 B 1
23 D 1
24 A 1
25 B 1
26 D 1
27 A 1
28 D 1
29 C 1
30 B 1
31 D 1
32 B 1
33 B 1
34 C 1
35 B 1
ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 12 March 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
1 D 1
2 D 1
3 A 1
4 C 1
5 A 1
6 D 1
7 A 1
8 D 1
9 A 1
10 B 1
11 A 1
12 B 1
13 C 1
14 C 1
15 C 1
16 C 1
17 A 1
18 C 1
19 B 1
20 B 1
21 A 1
22 D 1
23 B 1
24 A 1
25 C 1
26 D 1
27 A 1
28 D 1
29 C 1
30 C 1
31 B 1
32 B 1
33 C 1
34 D 1
35 C 1
ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice February/March 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
• There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 35.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
IB20 03_0452_12/2RP
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2
The business made a profit of $10 000 for the year ended 31 January 2020.
The owner did not make any drawings during the year.
account to account to
be debited be credited
A machinery Sachin
B purchases Sachin
C Sachin machinery
D Sachin purchases
4 Mui owns a household appliance store. He took home a washing machine for his personal use.
Mui recorded this transaction as follows.
drawings sales
A no no
B no yes
C yes no
D yes yes
Hanif account
2020 $ 2020 $
6 Which business document contains details of purchases, returns and payments occurring during
a trading period?
A credit note
B debit note
C invoice
D statement of account
7 Rashida sells goods on credit and allows her customers a trade discount.
1 A debit entry is made in the customer’s account in the sales ledger for the net value
of the goods sold.
2 The date of sale, name of the customer, cost price and trade discount are entered in
the sales journal.
3 The trade discount is debited to the customer’s account and credited to the discount
allowed account.
8 The totals of a trial balance agreed but it was found that the purchase of office equipment had
been debited to office expenses account.
A commission
B compensating
C original entry
D principle
9 On 31 January, Somraj’s bank statement showed a credit balance of $740. Comparing the bank
statement with the cash book he found the following.
10 When Mark started a car repair business, he purchased premises and equipment.
Two years later he spent $5000 on building an extension, $600 on new equipment and $750 on
repainting the original premises.
By how much will the non-current assets increase because of these transactions?
A as a capital receipt
B as a revenue receipt
C as capital expenditure
D as revenue expenditure
1 to match the cost against the revenue of the years which benefit from the use of the
asset
2 to provide a cash fund to enable the asset to be replaced at the end of its useful life
3 to recognise that most non-current assets lose value with the passage of time
4 to spread the cost of the asset over its expected working life to avoid overstating
profit
13 Equipment costing $20 000 was purchased on 1 January 2019. It has a useful working life of
5 years and a residual value of $3000. Depreciation using the straight-line method was included
in the income statement for the year ended 31 December 2019.
It was then found that the reducing balance method at 30% per annum should have been used.
What was the effect on the profit for the year ended 31 December 2019 of this error?
A $2000 overstated
B $2000 understated
C $2600 overstated
D $2600 understated
Which amounts will be charged to the income statement for the year ended 31 December 2019?
electricity insurance
$ $
A 900 800
B 1380 1240
C 1620 1160
D 2100 1600
15 Anjum rents part of her premises to Ajay for $6120 per annum. At the beginning of the year Ajay
had paid two months rent in advance. At the end of the year Ajay had paid three months rent in
advance.
How much rent was received from Ajay during the year?
16 A business maintains a provision for doubtful debts of 5% of trade receivables. The balance on
the provision for doubtful debts account on 31 December 2018 was $2700.
How will the provision for doubtful debts be recorded on 31 December 2019?
provision for
$ income statement $
doubtful debts account
17 At the end of the financial year Cindy valued her inventory at cost. This valuation incorrectly
included damaged goods costing $300. Cindy estimated these goods could be sold for $100.
premises 12 000
inventory 500
balance at bank 360
goodwill 3 000
cash 120
Which entries will be made in Hassan’s statement of financial position on 31 January 2020?
By how much would the working capital increase after these transactions?
goodwill 10 000
premises 25 000
trade receivables 9 500
trade payables 6 000
inventory 15 000
cash at bank 500 debit
long-term loan 5 000
On 31 December 2019 it was decided to use the remaining profit to pay a final ordinary share
dividend.
27 A manufacturing business provided the following information for the year ended
30 November 2019
28 What would be included in the statement of financial position of a manufacturing business but not
a wholesale business?
A cash
B office equipment
C trade receivables
D work in progress
29 The average inventory of a business was $40 000. The rate of inventory turnover was 5 times a
year. Mark-up was 20%.
31 Jake had current liabilities of trade payables and had current assets of inventory, trade
receivables and cash at bank.
32 Flo and Mo are traders selling similar goods at similar prices. They provided the following
information.
Flo Mo
A Flo Flo
B Flo Mo
C Mo Flo
D Mo Mo
34 Which accounting principle states that revenue should not be recorded before it is earned?
A consistency
B matching
C money measurement
D realisation
35 Which accounting objective requires that financial statements are free from bias and errors?
A comparability
B relevance
C reliability
D understandability
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper February/March 2020
1 hour 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
1 Amara maintains a petty cash book using the imprest system. The imprest amount of $200 is
restored on the first day of each month. On 1 January 2020 Amara had a balance of $65 in her
petty cash.
All payments of less than $100 are made from petty cash.
January 1 The petty cash imprest was restored from the business bank account.
19 Purchased goods on credit from Razvan, $200 less 10% trade discount
28 Returned goods to Razvan which had been purchased on 19 January, list price
$40
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare Amara’s petty cash book for the month of January 2020, on the page opposite.
Balance the petty cash book and bring down the balance on 1 February 2020.
© UCLES 2020
received paid stationery accounts
$ $ $ $ $
0452/22/F/M/20
…….......…… …….......…… ……………………………………........... …................... …................... …..................... ….....................
[10]
[Turn over
4
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the account of Amara as it would appear in the ledger of Razvan.
Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 February 2020.
Razvan
Amara account
[6]
On 2 February 2020 Amara paid the balance due to Razvan. She deducted cash discount of 2%.
REQUIRED
(c) Complete the following table by placing a tick (ü) in the correct column to show how Razvan
should record the cash discount. Where an account has no entry, tick ‘no entry’.
REQUIRED
(d) State two other methods which Amara could use to pay Razvan from her bank account.
1 ..............................................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 20]
2 GHB Limited maintains a full set of accounting records and prepares monthly control accounts.
$
Purchases ledger control account balance at 1 November ?
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the purchases ledger control account for GHB Limited for November 2019.
Balance the account on 30 November 2019 and bring down the balance on 1 December
2019.
GHB Limited
Purchases ledger control account
REQUIRED
(b) State two reasons why the purchase of the delivery vehicle was not recorded in the purchases
ledger control account.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) (i) State the most appropriate method of depreciation for the new delivery vehicle.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
1 .........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
3 .........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
The directors of GHB Limited are planning to finance a major expansion of the fleet of delivery
vehicles. $250 000 will be required for this expansion. The directors are considering whether to
issue additional ordinary shares or to obtain a long-term bank loan.
REQUIRED
(d) Advise the directors which of these two methods of finance is more appropriate.
Justify your answer with one advantage and one disadvantage of each option.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
debit credit
$ $
Revenue 124 000
Inventory at 1 January 2019 5 390
Purchases 55 440
Discount allowed 2 400
Discount received 1 385
Carriage outwards 6 160
Insurance 7 920
General expenses 8 100
Wages 9 600
Trade receivables 11 590
Trade payables 6 051
Bank 8 136
Premises at cost 90 000
Furniture at cost 24 000
Provision for depreciation on furniture 5 600
Capital accounts
Tia 80 000
Sarna 40 000
Current accounts
Tia 2 100
Sarna 1 600
Drawings
Tia 15 000
Sarna 17 000
Additional information
2 Depreciation on furniture is to be charged at 20% per annum using the straight-line method.
3 The insurance includes a payment of $2160 for the 12 months from 1 July 2019 to 30 June
2020.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement for Tia and Sarna for the year ended 31 December 2019.
$ $
……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….
[8]
(b) Prepare the appropriation account for Tia and Sarna for the year ended 31 December 2019.
$ $
……………………………………………………………....... ……………. …………….
[4]
(c) Prepare the current account for Sarna for the year ended 31 December 2019. Balance the
account and bring down the balance on 1 January 2020.
[4]
Tia and Sarna are considering transferring $7000 from the business bank account to an interest-
bearing deposit account.
REQUIRED
(d) Advise the partners whether or not they should make this transfer. Justify your answer by
providing advantages and disadvantages.
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................ [4]
[Total: 20]
Arjun prepared a trial balance on 31 January 2020. The totals of the debit and credit sides differed.
This difference was placed in a suspense account.
1 The total of the discount received column in the cash book for January, $135, had been
credited to the commission receivable account.
2 $200 received from the sale of fittings (net book value $150) had been correctly debited but
had been credited to the fixtures and fittings account.
3 Cash drawings, $40, had been correctly debited but had been credited to the purchases
account.
4 The total of the analysis column for cleaning in the petty cash book, $73, had been transferred
to both the cleaning account and the office expenses account.
5 The purchase of equipment, $575, had been credited to the equipment repairs account. The
bank account had been correctly credited.
6 No entries had been made for a cheque payment for office expenses, $90.
7 A cheque, $69, paid to Simone had been posted to the account of Simon.
REQUIRED
Arjun
Journal
(b) Prepare the suspense account. Include the original difference on the trial balance, as a
balancing figure.
Arjun
Suspense account
(c) Complete the following table by placing a tick (ü) in the correct column to indicate how each
of the errors would affect Arjun's capital.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................ [3]
[Total: 20]
At 31 January 2020
Non-current assets at book value 43 700
Inventory 9 340
Trade receivables 14 010
Trade payables 9 435
Bank overdraft 2 240
Bank loan (repayable 2023) 6 000
REQUIRED
profit margin
workings answer
liquid ratio
workings answer
[8]
The trade payables turnover for the year to 31 January 2019 was 35 days.
REQUIRED
(b) Advise Adit whether or not he should delay paying trade payables in order to reduce the bank
overdraft. Justify your answer by considering the effect on both the bank balance and the trade
payables.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(c) Suggest three other actions which Adit could take to reduce the bank overdraft.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................ [3]
(d) (i) State two reasons why Adit should produce an annual income statement.
1 .........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State two reasons why Adit should apply the money measurement principle.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 20]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 22 March 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.
Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.
Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.
Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).
Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.
1(a) Amara 10
Petty Cash Book
2020
65 Jan 1 Balance b/d
135 Bank (1)
3 Stationery (1) 24 24
7 Travel (1) 49 49
14 Razvan (1) 85 85
22 Taxi fare (1) 18 18
29 Postage (1) 11 11
187 67 35 85
31 Balance c/d 13
200 200
13 Feb 1 Balance b/d (1)
+ (1) dates
+ (1) OF totalling analysis columns
+ (1) OF for 2 matching totals
1(b) Razvan 6
Amara account
2020 $ 2020 $
Jan 1 Balance b/d 85 (1) Jan 14 Petty cash 85 (1)
19 Sales 180 (1) 28 Sales returns 36 (1)
31 Balance c/d 144
265 265
Feb 1 Balance b/d 144 (1)OF
+ (1) dates
1(c) 2
debit credit no entry
2(b) The purchases ledger control account does not include capital expenditure/non-current assets (1) 2
The purchases ledger control account only includes purchases of goods for resale (1)
The purchases ledger control account only includes transactions relating to trade payables (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
2(c)(ii) More depreciation is charged in the early years of its life (1) 3
Most of the benefit of the asset is gained in the early years (1)
The net book value is more likely to relate to the amount which will be realised on sale (1)
The vehicle may become out-of-date quickly depending on the vehicle type (1)
As repair costs are likely to be minimal in the early years, the overall charge to the income statement each year is more likely
to be fairly constant if the reducing balance method is used (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (3)
Disadvantages:
It may take longer to raise the funds (1)
Increased dividends may have to be paid (1)
All the shares need to be sold in order to raise the amount required (1)
Less control for existing shareholders (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)
Bank loan
Advantages:
Easier to set up/quicker to obtain funds (1)
May be repaid early (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)
Disadvantages:
A fixed rate of interest needs to be paid each year (1)
The interest would be payable irrespective of profit (1)
Must be re-paid in full within a fixed period (1)
Security would have to be provided (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)
Recommendation (1)
$ $
Revenue 124 000
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 5 390
Purchases 55 440
60 830
Less Closing inventory 5 165
55 665 (1)
Gross profit 68 335 (1)OF
Discount received 1 385 (1)
69 720
Less Expenses
Discount allowed 2 400 }
Carriage outwards 6 160 }(1)
Insurance (7 920 – 1 080) 6 840 (1)
General expenses 8 100 }
Wages 9 600 }(1)
Depreciation on Furniture (20% × 24 000) 4 800 (1) 37 900
Profit for the year 31 820 (1)OF
$ $
Profit for the year 31 820 (1) OF
Less Interest on capital Tia 4 000
Sarna 2 000
6 000 (1)
Salary Tia 6 000 (1) 12 000
19 820
Profit share Tia 9 910 }(1) OF
Sarna 9 910 } 19 820
3(d) Advantages 4
It would reduce cash sitting idle in the business bank account (1)
The levels of trade receivables and trade payables suggest that there will be future net cash inflow (1)
Interest would be earned on the amount transferred (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Disadvantages
It may not be possible to withdraw money from the deposit account without giving notice (1)
Cash may not be available if Tia decides to draw the full amount to which she is entitled at the end of the year (1)
Will decrease working capital/will reduce liquidity (1)
Tia and Sarna may be considering other uses for the cash (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
4(a) Arjun 9
Journal
Error Details Debit Credit
number $ $
3 Purchases 40 (1)
Cash 40 (1)
Correction of error – cash drawings posted in error to purchases (1)
4(b) Arjun 4
Suspense account
2020 $ 2020 $
Jan 31 Difference on trial 1 077 (1)OF Jan 31 Equipment repairs 575 (1)
balance Equipment 575 (1)
Office expenses 73 (1)
1 150 1 150
4(c) 4
Error number Increases Decreases No effect
capital capital on capital
3
4 (1)
5 (1)
6 (1)
7 (1)
5(a) 8
profit margin
workings answer
workings answer
workings answer
Liquid ratio
workings answer
5(b) Bank 5
May damage relationship with bank (1)
Already has a bank loan as well as the overdraft (1)
Has nearly reached his overdraft limit (1)
Bank may charge increased interest if overdraft limit is exceeded (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Trade payables
Relationship with suppliers may be damaged if he delays paying them (1)
Is taking longer to pay trade payables than he did last year (1)OF
May already be taking longer to pay than the credit period allowed (1)
Trade payables may refuse future supplies (1)
Interest may be charged on the overdue amount/cash discount will be forfeited (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
5(d)(ii) Non-monetary items cannot be recorded/only items which can be expressed in monetary terms can be recorded (1) 2
Money is a widely used/understood unit of measure (1)
Transactions are traditionally recorded in money terms (1)
Subjectivity/personal opinion is avoided (1)
Easier to make comparisons year-on-year/with other businesses (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice February/March 2021
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
Write in soft pencil.
Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
Do not use correction fluid.
Do not write on any bar codes.
You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
The total mark for this paper is 35.
Each correct answer will score one mark.
Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
IB21 03_0452_12/3RP
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2
A no no yes
B no yes yes
C yes no yes
D yes yes no
debit $ credit $
4 Jai is a manufacturer. On 1 February he purchased a machine costing $15 000 from Vinita. He
paid $10 000 immediately with a cheque from his personal bank account. The balance was to be
paid in June.
5 Jameel’s financial year ends on 31 December. On 1 January 2021 he brought down a debit
balance on his stationery account.
7 Which book of prime entry is written up from the copies of credit notes issued by a trader?
A purchases journal
B purchases returns journal
C sales journal
D sales returns journal
9 Raminder maintains a petty cash book using the imprest system. The monthly imprest of $250 is
restored on the first day of each month.
In January the petty cashier spent $105 and received a refund of $15 from a stationery supplier.
How much was given to the petty cashier on 1 February to restore the imprest?
10 The totals of a trial balance failed to agree. The total of the credit column was $10 000. Two
errors were later found.
What was the total of the debit column of the trial balance?
11 On 31 December 2020, the bank column in Farad’s cash book showed an overdrawn balance
of $2000.
The following items had not been entered in the cash book.
What was the corrected balance of the bank column in the cash book at 1 January 2021?
A $650 credit
B $650 debit
C $1150 credit
D $1150 debit
Raj’s account in Balbir’s sales ledger showed a debit balance of $300. There was a credit
balance of $100 on Raj’s account in the purchases ledger. A contra entry between the two
accounts was agreed.
Which entry would Balbir make in his purchases ledger control account?
A credit $100
B credit $200
C debit $100
D debit $200
13 Motor vehicle repairs, $2000, were debited to the motor vehicles account.
Motor vehicles are depreciated at 20% per annum on the balance of the account at the year end.
$ $
14 Mandeep depreciates his motor vehicles at the rate of 20% using the straight-line method.
Mandeep bought a motor vehicle on 1 January 2017 for $20 000. On 1 June 2020 he bought a
second motor vehicle for $10 000.
What was the depreciation charge on motor vehicles for the year ended 31 December 2020?
Rates account
$ $
A Rates are accrued at both the start and the end of the year.
B Rates are accrued at the start of the year and prepaid at the end of the year.
C Rates are prepaid at both the start and the end of the year.
D Rates are prepaid at the start of the year and accrued at the end of the year.
How had the total of trade receivables and the rate of provision for doubtful debts changed by
the end of the year?
A decreased decreased
B decreased increased
C increased decreased
D increased increased
19 Vinita’s credit customer paid the amount owing in cash, after deducting 2% discount for prompt
payment.
statement of financial
income statement
position
20 Mohan and Dipak are in partnership. They provided the following information at the end of the
financial year.
$ $
21 Raj and Rohit are in partnership sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 2 : 1. Raj is entitled to an
annual salary of $3000. The profit for the year ended 31 December 2020 was $14 100.
What was the credit balance on Raj’s current account on 1 January 2021?
22 Which items appear in the capital and reserves section of a statement of financial position of a
limited company?
For the year ended 31 December 2020, the company earned a profit of $65 000.
An ordinary share dividend of $20 000 was paid during the year and a further dividend for the
year of $15 000 was proposed. A transfer was made to general reserve of $40 000.
24 Which group contains only items which may be recorded in both the income statement of a
trading business and the income and expenditure account of a club?
25 The following ledger account appeared in the books of a club for the year ended
31 December 2020.
Subscriptions account
$ $
2020 2020
Jan 1 Balance b / d 2 000 Dec 31 Bank 29 000
Dec 31 Income and expenditure 24 000
Balance c / d 3 000
29 000 29 000
1 purchase of fabric
2 purchase of buttons
3 repairs to sewing machine
4 wages of factory supervisors
5 wages of sewing machinists
27 A manufacturer calculated the cost of production for the year at $57 000.
It was found that lighting and heating, $2000, had been omitted from the financial statements.
Lighting and heating is allocated 75% to the factory and 25% to the offices.
Tariq’s drawings for the year ended 31 January 2021 were $5000.
What was the profit for the year ended 31 January 2021?
29 Nour does not keep full accounting records. She provided the following information at the end of
the financial year.
What was the profit for the year before loan interest?
31 Which change would cause an increase in the liquid (acid test) ratio?
A a decrease in inventory
B an increase in inventory
C a decrease in the provision for doubtful debts
D an increase in the provision for doubtful debts
inventory $
What was the rate of turnover of inventory for the year ended 31 December 2020?
A increasing expenses
B increasing selling price
C reducing expenses
D reducing selling price
34 Amaira depreciates her non-current assets by the same rate and using the same method every
year.
35 Kamika’s financial statements did not comply with the accounting principle of money
measurement.
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 March 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2021 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
1 C 1
2 C 1
3 A 1
4 D 1
5 D 1
6 B 1
7 D 1
8 A 1
9 A 1
10 B 1
11 B 1
12 C 1
13 A 1
14 D 1
15 D 1
16 C 1
17 B 1
18 B 1
19 A 1
20 B 1
21 A 1
22 D 1
23 D 1
24 A 1
25 B 1
26 D 1
27 D 1
28 D 1
29 C 1
30 C 1
31 C 1
32 B 1
33 B 1
34 C 1
35 A 1
ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper February/March 2021
1 hour 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
DC (PQ) 200799/4
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2
3 Bought goods on credit from Dilip, list price $120, subject to a trade discount of
25%
6 Sold goods on credit to Kabir, list price $200, subject to a trade discount of 20%
9 Sold surplus office fittings for $110 which was paid by credit transfer
10 Returned goods to Dilip, list price $20. These goods had been purchased on
3 January
21 Kabir paid by cheque for the goods he purchased on 6 January, after deducting
cash discount of 7½%
24 Pari paid $141, by cheque, in full settlement of the purchases made on 20 January
26 Sold goods on credit to Yash, $62, offering him a discount of 5% if he paid within
21 days
REQUIRED
Shilpa
Sales journal
Date Details $ $
[4]
© UCLES 2021
allowed received
2021 $ $ $ 2021 $ $ $
Jan 1 Balance b/d ................ 200 814 ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................
........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................
........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................
........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................
........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................
........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................
........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................
3
0452/22/F/M/21
........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................
........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................
........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................
........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................
........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................ ........... ....................................... ................ ................ ................
[11]
[Turn over
4
(c) Prepare the ledger account of Dilip for January 2021. Balance the account and bring down
the balance on 1 February 2021.
There was no balance on Dilip’s account on 1 January 2021.
Shilpa
Dilip account
Date Details $ Date Details $
[4]
(d) Complete the table by placing a tick (3) to indicate which document Dilip would send to
Shilpa for the return of goods on 10 January.
Debit note
Credit note
[1]
[Total: 20]
BLANK PAGE
2 Zamir is in business providing legal services. Zamir provided the following balances from his
books of account at 31 December 2020.
$
Fee income 151 750
Rent and rates 26 000
Salaries 55 000
Stationery and advertising 6 450
Electricity 8 000
Bank charges 4 100
Office equipment – cost 60 000
Office equipment – provision for depreciation 22 500
Proceeds of disposal of office equipment 1 000
Bank overdraft 7 900
Trade receivables 15 600
Capital 57 000
Drawings 65 000
Additional information
1 The annual rent is $16 000. On 31 December 2020 rent was paid to cover the period from
1 January to 31 March 2021.
There was no accrual or prepayment of rent at 1 January 2020.
2 Rates of $6000 were paid during the year to 31 December 2020. This payment covered the
period 1 January 2020 to 31 October 2020 only. From 1 November 2020 annual rates were
$7560.
3 Depreciation is to be charged on office equipment at 15% per annum using the straight-line
method. No depreciation is charged in the year of disposal.
4 In February 2020 office equipment was sold for $1000. This equipment had been purchased
for $1800 on 1 January 2018. The sales proceeds have been debited to the bank account
and credited to the proceeds of disposal of office equipment account. No other entries have
been made in respect of the disposal.
5 One of Zamir’s clients has become bankrupt. The client owed $1885. Zamir does not expect
to recover this amount.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare Zamir’s income statement for the year ended 31 December 2020.
Zamir
Income Statement for the year ended 31 December 2020
$ $
[10]
(b) Prepare the assets section of Zamir’s statement of financial position at 31 December 2020.
Zamir
Statement of Financial Position (assets section) at 31 December 2020
$ $ $
[3]
(c) Suggest two possible reasons why Zamir required a bank overdraft.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
Zamir employs Sharif, who is another lawyer. Sharif also keeps the books of account for the
business. Zamir would like to ensure that Sharif does not leave to start work for a rival legal
business.
REQUIRED
(d) Advise Zamir whether he should offer Sharif an increase in salary or invite him to become a
partner in the business. Justify your answer with two advantages of each course of action.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
3 Rachel prepared her trial balance at 31 January. The total of the debit side was more than the total
of the credit side. Rachel entered the difference in a suspense account.
(a) Explain how the use of a suspense account allows a draft statement of financial position to be
prepared.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
1 A repair to the premises, $220, had been debited to the premises account.
2 The purchase of a motor vehicle, $3400, on credit from Neil’s Wheels, had not been recorded
in the accounting records.
3 Both the sales journal and the purchases journal had been overcast by $100.
4 Returns inwards, $19, had not been recorded in the returns inwards account.
5 Bank interest received, $25, had been debited to the bank charges account. The entry in the
bank account had been correctly made.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the journal entries to correct errors 1–5. Narratives are not required.
Rachel
Journal
Error Details Debit Credit
number $ $
[11]
.................................... [1]
.................................... [1]
(d) Complete the table to indicate the effect of each error on gross profit and on profit for the
year. The first one has been completed as an example.
5
[4]
(e) State why a balance may remain on the suspense account after errors 1–5 have been
corrected.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 20]
$
For the year to 31 December 2020
Credit sales 114 400
Credit purchases 63 110
Gross profit 51 480
At 31 December 2020
Inventory 2 850
Trade receivables 15 400
Trade payables 7 430
Bank overdraft 6 190
REQUIRED
trade receivables
turnover days
(round up to next whole day)
current ratio
(correct to two decimal places)
[6]
Chaaya is comparing her ratios with those of Sara, her main competitor. Based on Sara’s most
recent financial statements, her trade receivables turnover is 28 days.
REQUIRED
(b) (i) Compare Chaaya’s trade receivables turnover with Sara’s trade receivables turnover.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
Chaaya is considering stopping selling on credit and instead selling on a cash only basis. Chaaya
would offer a trade discount of 12% to regular customers in order to maintain a good relationship
with customers.
REQUIRED
(c) Advise Chaaya whether she should start to make cash sales only and offer the trade discount.
Justify your answer by providing two advantages and two disadvantages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(d) (i) State two reasons why Chaaya’s employees would be interested in her financial
statements.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State two types of users of Chaaya’s financial statements, other than Chaaya and her
employees.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 20]
REQUIRED
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
Maira has not kept a full set of accounting records, but provided the following information.
1 All sales were made on cash terms. The sales for the first year were:
2 During the year Maira purchased 1400 units. Carriage was paid on these units.
3 Maira took goods from the business during the year ended 31 December 2020. No record
was kept of these drawings.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare Maira’s income statement (trading section) for the year ended 31 December 2020.
Maira
Income Statement (trading section) for the year ended 31 December 2020
$ $
[8]
Maira has been too busy to keep a full set of accounting records. However, she is now considering
using double-entry book-keeping for her business.
(c) Advise Maira on whether or not she should start to keep a full set of accounting records.
Justify your answer with two advantages and two disadvantages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(d) Place a tick (3) in the correct column to indicate to Maira the book of prime entry in which
each of the following should be recorded.
(e) Complete the table by placing a tick (3) in the correct column to indicate to Maira the
accounting objective which is described in each statement.
[Total: 20]
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 March 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2021 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.
Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.
Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.
Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).
Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.
a DO credit answers which are worded differently from the mark scheme if they clearly convey the same meaning (unless the mark
scheme requires a specific term)
b DO credit alternative answers/examples which are not written in the mark scheme if they are correct
c DO credit answers where candidates give more than one correct answer in one prompt/numbered/scaffolded space where extended
writing is required rather than list-type answers. For example, questions that require n reasons (e.g. State two reasons …).
d DO NOT credit answers simply for using a ‘key term’ unless that is all that is required. (Check for evidence it is understood and not used
wrongly.)
e DO NOT credit answers which are obviously self-contradicting or trying to cover all possibilities
f DO NOT give further credit for what is effectively repetition of a correct point already credited unless the language itself is being tested.
This applies equally to ‘mirror statements’ (i.e. polluted/not polluted).
g DO NOT require spellings to be correct, unless this is part of the test. However spellings of syllabus terms must allow for clear and
unambiguous separation from other syllabus terms with which they may be confused (e.g. Corrasion/Corrosion)
4 Annotation:
• For point marking, ticks can be used to indicate correct answers and crosses can be used to indicate wrong answers. There is no direct
relationship between ticks and marks. Ticks have no defined meaning for levels of response marking.
• For levels of response marking, the level awarded should be annotated on the script.
• Other annotations will be used by examiners as agreed during standardisation, and the meaning will be understood by all examiners
who marked that paper.
1(a) Shilpa 4
Sales journal
Date Details $
2021
Jan 6 Kabir (200 – 40) 160 (1)
20 Pari 150 (1)
26 Yash 62 (1)
31 Transfer to sales account 372 (1) OF
1(b) Shilpa 11
Cash Book
+ (1) dates
1(c) Shilpa 4
Dilip account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2021 2021
Jan 10 Purchases returns (1) 15 Jan 3 Purchases (1) 90
(20–5) (120 – 30)
11 Cash (1) 50
31 Balance c/d 25
90 90
Feb 1 Balance b/d (1)OF 25
1(d) 1
Debit note
2(a) Zamir 10
Income Statement for the year ended 31 December 2020
$ $
Fee income 151 750
Less Expenses
*Rent and rates
(26 000 – 4 000 (1) + 1 260 (1)) 23 260
Salaries 55 000 }
Stationery and advertising 6 450 } (1)
Electricity 8 000 }
Bank charges 4 100 } (1)
Irrecoverable debts 1 885 (1)
Loss on disposal of office equipment
(1 000 – (1 260) (1) 260 (1)OF
Depreciation of office equipment
(60 000 – 1 800 = 58 200 × 15% (1) 8 730 (1)OF 107 685
Profit for the year 44 065 (1)OF
2(b) Zamir 3
Statement of Financial Position (assets section) at 31 December 2020
$ $ $
Assets
Non-current Assets Cost Accumulated Net book
depreciation value
*Office equipment 58 200 (1) 30 690 (1)OF 27 510 OF
Current Assets
Trade receivables (15 600 – 1 885) 13 715 } (1)
Other receivables 4 000 }
17 715
Total assets 45 225
Recommendation (1)
3(a) The suspense account balance is entered on the trial balance (1) 2
This means that there are equal debits and credits on the trial balance/the trial balance will balance (1)
3(b) Rachel 11
Journal
Error Details Debit Credit
number $ $
Suspense 50 (1)
5 Bank interest received 25 (1)
Bank charges 25 (1)
3(d) 4
Gross Profit Profit for the year
Error
number
1 220
2 (1)
3 (1)
4 19 19 (1)
5 50 (1)
3(e) The accounting records may contain other errors which have not yet been found (1) 1
4(a) 6
ratio working answer
51 480 100
gross margin × (1) whole formula 45% (1)
114 400 1
4(b)(i) If Chaaya’s trade receivables turnover (in answer to (a)) is greater than Sara’s (Sara’s was 28 days) 3
Chaaya’s trade receivables turnover is slower than Sara’s (1)
Chaaya may be allowing her credit customers longer to pay (1)
Chaaya’s credit customers may not be paying within a stated credit period (1)
Chaaya’s credit control policy may not be efficient (1)
This may be causing Chaaya to have more cash flow problems than Sara (1)
This may result in Chaaya having more irrecoverable debts than Sara (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (3)
If Chaaya’s trade receivables turnover (in answer to (a)) is less than Sara’s (Sara’s was 28 days)
Chaaya’s trade receivables turnover is faster than Sara’s (1)
Chaaya may be allowing her credit customers less time to pay (1)
Chaaya’s customers may be paying within a stated credit period (1)
Chaaya is less likely to have irrecoverable debts than Sara (1)
Chaaya’s credit control policy is more efficient than Sara’s (1)
This may be causing Chaaya to have fewer cash flow problems than Sara (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (3)
4(b)(ii) Chaaya and Sara may allow different credit periods (1) 2
Chaaya and Sara may use different accounting policies (1)
Chaaya and Sara may have different year-ends (1)
The figures relate to one year only. It would be more meaningful to look at trends (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
4(c) Advantages 5
Cash would be received quicker (1)
The bank overdraft may be reduced (1)
Overdraft interest may be reduced (1)
There would be no irrecoverable debts (1)
There would be fewer administration costs (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Disadvantages
May lose customers who prefer to buy on credit / damage relationship with customers (1)
Less profit due to trade discount/reduction in selling price/reduction in sales(revenue) (1)
If sales are usually one-off rather than regular, the trade discount may have little effect (1)
Increased risk of fraud or theft/ increased security measures required (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
4(d)(i) If the business has sufficient profitability/liquidity to continue to offer them employment (1) 2
Whether Chaaya could afford to pay them an increase in wages (1)
5(b) Maira 8
Income Statement (trading section) for the year ended 31 December 2020
$ $
Revenue
2 × 10 800 = 21 600
8 × 12 000 = 96 000
2 × 16 200 = 32 400
150 000
5(c) Advantages 5
Maira would have all the necessary figures e.g. balances of individual ledger accounts (1)
If the business grows, it will be more difficult to prepare financial statements from incomplete records (1)
Detailed records would be available for future reference (1)
More accurate comparisons year-on-year/with other businesses is possible (1)
More informed decision making will be possible (1)
The government/tax office may require an adequate amount of accounting records (1)
If Maira wishes to sell the business, a potential buyer may wish to see full accounting records (1)
Lenders/potential lenders can be provided with adequate information (1)
Maira should be able to prepare financial statements more easily (1)
Maira should be able to prepare financial statements more accurately (1)
Assist in location of errors/checking procedures, e.g. control accounts may be used (1)
The possibility of fraud would be minimised (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Disadvantages
Maira’s financial statements may be prepared from incomplete records (1)
Maira is busy so she may not have time for book-keeping (1)
It may take Maira time to learn double-entry book-keeping (1)
Any spare time which Maira can find may be better spent on e.g. marketing (1)
If Maira pays a book-keeper to write up her books, the cost of this will reduce her profits (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
5(d) 3
Cash book Purchases Purchases
journal returns journal
5(e) 2
Comparability Relevance Reliability
ACCOUNTING 0452/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
• There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 35.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
IB20 06_0452_11/4RP
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2
2 The balances remaining on the books of a business after the preparation of the income statement
included the following.
3 On 2 April Nina received a cheque from Zaffar, a credit customer. On 12 April the cheque was
returned unpaid by the bank.
4 Ann is a trader. On 1 April Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger showed a credit balance of $520. The
following transactions took place during April.
Which statement about the balance on Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger on 30 April is correct?
5 Goods bought on credit by Tumelo from Tebogo are returned before they are paid for. Tumelo
keeps a full double entry system.
6 Dave supplies goods to Peter on credit. On 1 April, Peter owed Dave $440. Dave sent or
received the following documents in April.
11 The income statement of a business showed a loss for the year of $16 000. On checking the
books the following errors were discovered.
12 Peter’s bank statement showed a debit balance of $600 on 1 April. The following transactions
took place in April.
A $870 credit
B $870 debit
C $2070 credit
D $2070 debit
It was found that a $2000 contra entry to the purchases ledger control account had been entered
on the wrong side of the sales ledger control account.
What was the correct debit balance on the sales ledger control account?
14 A business had a new extension to its workshop premises. It incurred the following expenditure.
15 A non-current asset was depreciated at the end of the first year of ownership using the
straight-line method based on the following information.
It was then found that the reducing balance method at 30% per annum should have been used.
What was the effect on the profit for the year of correcting this error?
A decrease by $2000
B increase by $2000
C decrease by $6000
D increase by $6000
16 A company’s financial year ended on 31 December 2019. On 1 December 2019 it paid rent,
$8000, for the four months ending 31 March 2020.
What was the opening balance on the rent account on 1 January 2020?
A $2000 credit
B $2000 debit
C $6000 credit
D $6000 debit
18 Joseph sells goods on credit and maintains a provision for doubtful debts. He wants to increase
his provision for doubtful debts by $250.
Which journal entry records an increase in the provision for doubtful debts?
debit credit
$ $
A credit customer 250
income statement 250
B income statement 250
credit customer 250
C income statement 250
provision for doubtful debts 250
D provision for doubtful debts 250
income statement 250
19 Which items are deducted from the gross profit when calculating the profit for the year?
20 On 31 December 2019 John had net assets of $2000 and capital of $2000.
On 1 January 2020, goods costing $140 were sold on credit for $220.
What was the effect of this transaction on the statement of financial position?
$ $
A 80 decrease 80 decrease
B 80 increase 80 increase
C 220 decrease 220 decrease
D 220 increase 220 increase
21 At the end of his financial year, Raminder made an adjustment for rent owed by a tenant.
profit for
current assets
the year
A decrease decrease
B decrease increase
C increase decrease
D increase increase
22 The owner of a business took goods for his own use but forgot to make an entry in the accounts.
A overstated no effect
B overstated understated
C understated no effect
D understated overstated
23 Rajid and Sunil formed a partnership on 1 January 2019 but did not prepare a partnership
agreement.
Rajid Sunil
A interest on capital
B interest on drawings
C limit on annual drawings
D partnership salaries
24 Harry and Jane are in partnership. The following information relates to Harry for the financial
year.
salary 8000
drawings 2800
share of profit 4600
The opening credit balance on Harry’s current account was $28 200.
25 Which item is shown in the income statement of a company and statement of changes in equity?
26 Hassan’s capital decreased by $200 over the year, even though he made a profit of $7000.
A 1000 8200
B 1200 6000
C 2000 8800
D 2200 4600
By how much had the trade receivables increased by the end of the financial year?
30 On 1 January 2019 current assets totalled $16 000 and the current ratio was 2 : 1.
On 31 December 2019 the current liabilities had increased by 50% and the current ratio was
1.5 : 1.
31 A company provided the following information about its liquid (acid test) ratio.
Year 1 1.2 : 1
Year 2 1.4 : 1
Year 3 1.6 : 1
A Inventory is increasing.
B Other payables are decreasing.
C Trade payables are increasing.
D Trade receivables are decreasing.
32 Which user of accounting statements is interested in past performance and taking remedial action
where necessary?
A government
B investors
C managers
D suppliers
33 Rashid’s financial year ends on 31 December. He paid rent on 1 February, 1 May, 1 August and
1 November.
A duality
B matching
C money measurement
D prudence
A Accounting methods must be used consistently from one accounting period to the next.
B It is assumed that the business will continue to operate for the foreseeable future.
C Revenue is earned when legal title to goods passes from the seller to the buyer.
D The business is treated as being completely separate from the owner of the business.
35 Brad purchased a machine for $1000 on 1 January 2019. The machine was expected to last for
four years and have no residual value. On 31 December 2019 the same machine cost $1200 to
purchase.
At which value should the machine be included in the statement of financial position on
31 December 2019?
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/11
Paper 1 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35
Published
Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.
This mark scheme is published to support teachers and students and should be read together with the
question paper. It shows the requirements of the exam.
Mark schemes should usually be read together with the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. However,
because students did not sit exam papers, there is no Principal Examiner Report for Teachers for the June
2020 series.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.
1 A 1
2 C 1
3 D 1
4 A 1
5 C 1
6 B 1
7 D 1
8 C 1
9 D 1
10 B 1
11 C 1
12 A 1
13 A 1
14 C 1
15 A 1
16 D 1
17 B 1
18 C 1
19 D 1
20 B 1
21 D 1
22 C 1
23 A 1
24 B 1
25 C 1
26 A 1
27 A 1
28 D 1
29 D 1
30 B 1
31 B 1
32 C 1
33 B 1
34 B 1
35 D 1
ACCOUNTING 0452/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
• There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 35.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
IB20 06_0452_11/4RP
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2
2 The balances remaining on the books of a business after the preparation of the income statement
included the following.
3 On 2 April Nina received a cheque from Zaffar, a credit customer. On 12 April the cheque was
returned unpaid by the bank.
4 Ann is a trader. On 1 April Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger showed a credit balance of $520. The
following transactions took place during April.
Which statement about the balance on Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger on 30 April is correct?
5 Goods bought on credit by Tumelo from Tebogo are returned before they are paid for. Tumelo
keeps a full double entry system.
6 Dave supplies goods to Peter on credit. On 1 April, Peter owed Dave $440. Dave sent or
received the following documents in April.
11 The income statement of a business showed a loss for the year of $16 000. On checking the
books the following errors were discovered.
12 Peter’s bank statement showed a debit balance of $600 on 1 April. The following transactions
took place in April.
A $870 credit
B $870 debit
C $2070 credit
D $2070 debit
It was found that a $2000 contra entry to the purchases ledger control account had been entered
on the wrong side of the sales ledger control account.
What was the correct debit balance on the sales ledger control account?
14 A business had a new extension to its workshop premises. It incurred the following expenditure.
15 A non-current asset was depreciated at the end of the first year of ownership using the
straight-line method based on the following information.
It was then found that the reducing balance method at 30% per annum should have been used.
What was the effect on the profit for the year of correcting this error?
A decrease by $2000
B increase by $2000
C decrease by $6000
D increase by $6000
16 A company’s financial year ended on 31 December 2019. On 1 December 2019 it paid rent,
$8000, for the four months ending 31 March 2020.
What was the opening balance on the rent account on 1 January 2020?
A $2000 credit
B $2000 debit
C $6000 credit
D $6000 debit
18 Joseph sells goods on credit and maintains a provision for doubtful debts. He wants to increase
his provision for doubtful debts by $250.
Which journal entry records an increase in the provision for doubtful debts?
debit credit
$ $
A credit customer 250
income statement 250
B income statement 250
credit customer 250
C income statement 250
provision for doubtful debts 250
D provision for doubtful debts 250
income statement 250
19 Which items are deducted from the gross profit when calculating the profit for the year?
20 On 31 December 2019 John had net assets of $2000 and capital of $2000.
On 1 January 2020, goods costing $140 were sold on credit for $220.
What was the effect of this transaction on the statement of financial position?
$ $
A 80 decrease 80 decrease
B 80 increase 80 increase
C 220 decrease 220 decrease
D 220 increase 220 increase
21 At the end of his financial year, Raminder made an adjustment for rent owed by a tenant.
profit for
current assets
the year
A decrease decrease
B decrease increase
C increase decrease
D increase increase
22 The owner of a business took goods for his own use but forgot to make an entry in the accounts.
A overstated no effect
B overstated understated
C understated no effect
D understated overstated
23 Rajid and Sunil formed a partnership on 1 January 2019 but did not prepare a partnership
agreement.
Rajid Sunil
A interest on capital
B interest on drawings
C limit on annual drawings
D partnership salaries
24 Harry and Jane are in partnership. The following information relates to Harry for the financial
year.
salary 8000
drawings 2800
share of profit 4600
The opening credit balance on Harry’s current account was $28 200.
25 Which item is shown in the income statement of a company and statement of changes in equity?
26 Hassan’s capital decreased by $200 over the year, even though he made a profit of $7000.
A 1000 8200
B 1200 6000
C 2000 8800
D 2200 4600
By how much had the trade receivables increased by the end of the financial year?
30 On 1 January 2019 current assets totalled $16 000 and the current ratio was 2 : 1.
On 31 December 2019 the current liabilities had increased by 50% and the current ratio was
1.5 : 1.
31 A company provided the following information about its liquid (acid test) ratio.
Year 1 1.2 : 1
Year 2 1.4 : 1
Year 3 1.6 : 1
A Inventory is increasing.
B Other payables are decreasing.
C Trade payables are increasing.
D Trade receivables are decreasing.
32 Which user of accounting statements is interested in past performance and taking remedial action
where necessary?
A government
B investors
C managers
D suppliers
33 Rashid’s financial year ends on 31 December. He paid rent on 1 February, 1 May, 1 August and
1 November.
A duality
B matching
C money measurement
D prudence
A Accounting methods must be used consistently from one accounting period to the next.
B It is assumed that the business will continue to operate for the foreseeable future.
C Revenue is earned when legal title to goods passes from the seller to the buyer.
D The business is treated as being completely separate from the owner of the business.
35 Brad purchased a machine for $1000 on 1 January 2019. The machine was expected to last for
four years and have no residual value. On 31 December 2019 the same machine cost $1200 to
purchase.
At which value should the machine be included in the statement of financial position on
31 December 2019?
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/11
Paper 1 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35
Published
Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.
This mark scheme is published to support teachers and students and should be read together with the
question paper. It shows the requirements of the exam.
Mark schemes should usually be read together with the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. However,
because students did not sit exam papers, there is no Principal Examiner Report for Teachers for the June
2020 series.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.
1 A 1
2 C 1
3 D 1
4 A 1
5 C 1
6 B 1
7 D 1
8 C 1
9 D 1
10 B 1
11 C 1
12 A 1
13 A 1
14 C 1
15 A 1
16 D 1
17 B 1
18 C 1
19 D 1
20 B 1
21 D 1
22 C 1
23 A 1
24 B 1
25 C 1
26 A 1
27 A 1
28 D 1
29 D 1
30 B 1
31 B 1
32 C 1
33 B 1
34 B 1
35 D 1
ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
• There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 35.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
IB20 06_0452_12/3RP
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2
3 A trader bought new fixtures. He paid half of the purchase price in cash and agreed to pay the
balance in two months’ time.
owner’s
assets liabilities
equity
4 On 2 April Nina received a cheque from Zaffar, a credit customer. On 12 April the cheque was
returned unpaid by the bank.
5 Ann is a trader. On 1 April Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger showed a credit balance of $520. The
following transactions took place during April.
Which statement about the balance on Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger on 30 April is correct?
6 Goods bought on credit by Tumelo from Tebogo are returned before they are paid for. Tumelo
keeps a full double entry system.
7 Dave supplies goods to Peter on credit. On 1 April, Peter owed Dave $440. Dave sent or
received the following documents in April.
How much was received in full settlement from a customer who bought 25 items and paid after
35 days?
9 Paul rents premises from John and pays the rent by credit transfer.
10 Sita discovers that $1000 received from the sale of fixtures had been entered in the sales
account.
debit credit
$ $
bank 1000
A
disposal of fixtures 1000
bank 1000
B
fixtures 1000
sales 1000
C
disposal of fixtures 1000
sales 1000
D
fixtures 1000
11 The totals of a trial balance did not agree and $200 was debited to a suspense account. On
checking the books it was found that two errors had been made.
1 A sales invoice for $700 had been recorded in the sales journal as $770.
2 The sales journal had been totalled incorrectly.
A overcast by $130
B overcast by $200
C undercast by $130
D undercast by $200
12 The income statement of a business showed a loss for the year of $16 000. On checking the
books the following errors were discovered.
13 What would result in a cash book balance being lower than the balance showing on a bank
statement?
A A cheque received from a customer was not recorded in the bank statement.
B A customer’s cheque dishonoured by the bank appeared only on the bank statement.
C Payment by a customer directly into the bank was not recorded in the cash book.
D Payment of insurance by standing order was not recorded in the cash book.
14 Thembi is preparing her sales ledger control account. She needs to know:
1 The total for goods which have been returned by credit customers.
2 The amount owed by credit customers which have been written off as irrecoverable.
15 The following payments were made when a new machine was purchased.
16 A non-current asset was depreciated at the end of the first year of ownership using the
straight-line method based on the following information.
It was then found that the reducing balance method at 30% per annum should have been used.
What was the effect on the profit for the year of correcting this error?
A decrease by $2000
B increase by $2000
C decrease by $6000
D increase by $6000
17 Elzevir purchased a motor vehicle costing $8000 on 1 January 2018. It is depreciated at 40% on
the reducing balance basis.
Which journal entry records the depreciation for the year ended 31 December 2019?
debit credit
A income statement 1920
provision for depreciation of motor vehicles 1920
B income statement 3200
provision for depreciation of motor vehicles 3200
C provision for depreciation of motor vehicles 1920
motor vehicles 1920
D provision for depreciation of motor vehicles 3200
motor vehicles 3200
19 Annual rental income due from Kumar, a tenant, is $3600. At the start of the year Kumar had
prepaid rent of $900. At the end of the year he owed two months’ rent.
How much rent was received from Kumar during the year?
20 Joel’s inventory on 31 December 2019 was valued at $4800. It was discovered that:
What was the effect of the incorrect inventory valuation on Joel’s financial statements at
31 December 2019?
profit for
$ inventory $ equity $
the year
21 The owner of a business took goods for his own use but forgot to make an entry in the accounts.
A overstated no effect
B overstated understated
C understated no effect
D understated overstated
22 Rajid and Sunil formed a partnership on 1 January 2019 but did not prepare a partnership
agreement.
Rajid Sunil
A interest on capital
B interest on drawings
C limit on annual drawings
D partnership salaries
23 Harry and Jane are in partnership. The following information relates to Harry for the financial
year.
salary 8000
drawings 2800
share of profit 4600
The opening credit balance on Harry’s current account was $28 200.
24 The statement of financial position of X Limited at 31 December 2018 included the following:
Profit for the year ended 31 December 2019 was $42 000 and dividends paid totalled $10 000.
A carriage inwards
B carriage outwards
C factory rent
D factory supervisor’s salary
30 Sabelo’s liquid (acid test) ratio was higher on 1 January 2019 than it was on 31 December 2019.
year 1 year 2
A government
B investors
C managers
D tax authorities
33 At the end of the financial year, a company did not account for the unused stationary valued
at $50.
A matching
B materiality
C money measurement
D prudence
A business entity
B consistency
C money measurement
D prudence
35 A limited company applied the accounting objective of comparability in preparing its financial
statements.
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35
Published
Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.
This mark scheme is published to support teachers and students and should be read together with the
question paper. It shows the requirements of the exam.
Mark schemes should usually be read together with the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. However,
because students did not sit exam papers, there is no Principal Examiner Report for Teachers for the June
2020 series.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.
1 B 1
2 D 1
3 D 1
4 D 1
5 A 1
6 C 1
7 B 1
8 C 1
9 A 1
10 C 1
11 B 1
12 C 1
13 C 1
14 D 1
15 C 1
16 A 1
17 A 1
18 B 1
19 A 1
20 D 1
21 C 1
22 A 1
23 B 1
24 B 1
25 A 1
26 A 1
27 D 1
28 D 1
29 D 1
30 D 1
31 C 1
32 B 1
33 B 1
34 D 1
35 B 1
ACCOUNTING 0452/13
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
• There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 35.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
IB20 06_0452_13/FP
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2
3 A trader bought new fixtures. He paid half of the purchase price in cash and agreed to pay the
balance in two months’ time.
owner’s
assets liabilities
equity
4 On 2 April Nina received a cheque from Zaffar, a credit customer. On 12 April the cheque was
returned unpaid by the bank.
5 Ann is a trader. On 1 April Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger showed a credit balance of $520. The
following transactions took place during April.
Which statement about the balance on Cindy’s account in Ann’s ledger on 30 April is correct?
6 Goods bought on credit by Tumelo from Tebogo are returned before they are paid for. Tumelo
keeps a full double entry system.
7 Dave supplies goods to Peter on credit. On 1 April, Peter owed Dave $440. Dave sent or
received the following documents in April.
How much was received in full settlement from a customer who bought 25 items and paid after
35 days?
9 Paul rents premises from John and pays the rent by credit transfer.
10 Sita discovers that $1000 received from the sale of fixtures had been entered in the sales
account.
debit credit
$ $
bank 1000
A
disposal of fixtures 1000
bank 1000
B
fixtures 1000
sales 1000
C
disposal of fixtures 1000
sales 1000
D
fixtures 1000
11 The totals of a trial balance did not agree and $200 was debited to a suspense account. On
checking the books it was found that two errors had been made.
1 A sales invoice for $700 had been recorded in the sales journal as $770.
2 The sales journal had been totalled incorrectly.
A overcast by $130
B overcast by $200
C undercast by $130
D undercast by $200
12 The income statement of a business showed a loss for the year of $16 000. On checking the
books the following errors were discovered.
13 What would result in a cash book balance being lower than the balance showing on a bank
statement?
A A cheque received from a customer was not recorded in the bank statement.
B A customer’s cheque dishonoured by the bank appeared only on the bank statement.
C Payment by a customer directly into the bank was not recorded in the cash book.
D Payment of insurance by standing order was not recorded in the cash book.
14 Thembi is preparing her sales ledger control account. She needs to know:
1 The total for goods which have been returned by credit customers.
2 The amount owed by credit customers which have been written off as irrecoverable.
15 The following payments were made when a new machine was purchased.
16 A non-current asset was depreciated at the end of the first year of ownership using the
straight-line method based on the following information.
It was then found that the reducing balance method at 30% per annum should have been used.
What was the effect on the profit for the year of correcting this error?
A decrease by $2000
B increase by $2000
C decrease by $6000
D increase by $6000
17 Elzevir purchased a motor vehicle costing $8000 on 1 January 2018. It is depreciated at 40% on
the reducing balance basis.
Which journal entry records the depreciation for the year ended 31 December 2019?
debit credit
A income statement 1920
provision for depreciation of motor vehicles 1920
B income statement 3200
provision for depreciation of motor vehicles 3200
C provision for depreciation of motor vehicles 1920
motor vehicles 1920
D provision for depreciation of motor vehicles 3200
motor vehicles 3200
19 Annual rental income due from Kumar, a tenant, is $3600. At the start of the year Kumar had
prepaid rent of $900. At the end of the year he owed two months’ rent.
How much rent was received from Kumar during the year?
20 Joel’s inventory on 31 December 2019 was valued at $4800. It was discovered that:
What was the effect of the incorrect inventory valuation on Joel’s financial statements at
31 December 2019?
profit for
$ inventory $ equity $
the year
21 The owner of a business took goods for his own use but forgot to make an entry in the accounts.
A overstated no effect
B overstated understated
C understated no effect
D understated overstated
22 Rajid and Sunil formed a partnership on 1 January 2019 but did not prepare a partnership
agreement.
Rajid Sunil
A interest on capital
B interest on drawings
C limit on annual drawings
D partnership salaries
23 Harry and Jane are in partnership. The following information relates to Harry for the financial
year.
salary 8000
drawings 2800
share of profit 4600
The opening credit balance on Harry’s current account was $28 200.
24 The statement of financial position of X Limited at 31 December 2018 included the following:
Profit for the year ended 31 December 2019 was $42 000 and dividends paid totalled $10 000.
A carriage inwards
B carriage outwards
C factory rent
D factory supervisor’s salary
30 Sabelo’s liquid (acid test) ratio was higher on 1 January 2019 than it was on 31 December 2019.
year 1 year 2
A government
B investors
C managers
D tax authorities
33 At the end of the financial year, a company did not account for the unused stationary valued
at $50.
A matching
B materiality
C money measurement
D prudence
A business entity
B consistency
C money measurement
D prudence
35 A limited company applied the accounting objective of comparability in preparing its financial
statements.
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/13
Paper 1 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35
Published
Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.
This mark scheme is published to support teachers and students and should be read together with the
question paper. It shows the requirements of the exam.
Mark schemes should usually be read together with the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. However,
because students did not sit exam papers, there is no Principal Examiner Report for Teachers for the June
2020 series.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.
1 B 1
2 D 1
3 D 1
4 D 1
5 A 1
6 C 1
7 B 1
8 C 1
9 A 1
10 C 1
11 B 1
12 C 1
13 C 1
14 D 1
15 C 1
16 A 1
17 A 1
18 B 1
19 A 1
20 D 1
21 C 1
22 A 1
23 B 1
24 B 1
25 A 1
26 A 1
27 D 1
28 D 1
29 D 1
30 D 1
31 C 1
32 B 1
33 B 1
34 D 1
35 B 1
ACCOUNTING 0452/21
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper May/June 2020
1 hour 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
1 The ZED Sports Club has a shop which sells sportswear. The following details relate to the shop
for the year ended 29 February 2020.
$
Opening inventory 900
Closing inventory 970
Purchases 7600
Mark-up 40%
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the shop sales for year ended 29 February 2020.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
All the shop sales and purchases are for cash. All the club’s receipts are paid into the bank and
all payments are made by cheque. On 1 March 2019 the club’s bank balance was overdrawn by
$845.
In addition to the shop sales and purchases, the following receipts and payments were made
during the year ended 29 February 2020.
$
Subscriptions received 11 400
Competition fees received 915
Payments for competition prizes 390
Purchases of fittings 4 000
Rent and insurance 4 575
Wages of shop assistant 2 000
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the receipts and payments account for the ZED Sports Club for the year ended
29 February 2020. Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 March 2020.
The club’s bank statement at 29 February 2020 showed a positive balance of $7162.
On comparing the bank statement with the cash book, the treasurer found:
2 A cheque paid for $25 for competition prizes had been charged twice by the bank.
3 The payment for fittings, $4000, was made on 27 February 2020, and had not been recorded
on the bank statement.
REQUIRED
(c) Prepare the bank reconciliation statement for ZED Sports Club at 29 February 2020.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(d) State three differences between a receipts and payments account and an income and
expenditure account.
[3]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20
5
2 Ame provided the following balances from his books at 31 March 2020.
$
Capital 10 369
Drawings 4 000
Equipment at cost 15 500
Provision for depreciation of equipment 3 100
Inventory at 1 April 2019 1 765
Trade receivables 1 290
Bank overdraft 475
Trade payables 1 600
Sales 31 250
Purchases 18 330
Purchases returns 910
Carriage inwards 640
Discount received 815
Commission receivable 1 500
Rent and insurance 5 700
Office expenses 2 425
REQUIRED
Show the difference in the trial balance totals as a suspense account balance.
Ame
Trial Balance at 31 March 2020
Debit Credit
$ $
…………………… ……………………
______________ ______________
______________ ______________
[6]
Ame later discovered several errors had been made in the accounting records.
REQUIRED
(b) Complete the table to show the entries required to correct each error.
The first one has been completed as an example.
[9]
(c) Prepare the suspense account. Start with the difference on the trial balance prepared in
Part (a). Balance or total the account as necessary.
Ame
Suspense account
[Total 20]
3 Chippo owns a manufacturing business which produces product S. She provided the following
information for the year ended 30 April 2020.
$
Revenue 254 000
Purchases of raw materials 46 500
Purchases of finished goods 59 000
Wages of factory operatives 38 250
Royalties paid to the inventor of product S 7 690
Factory general expenses 4 500
Factory fuel and power 5 325
Rent and insurance 28 000
Factory machinery at cost 60 000
Provision for depreciation of factory machinery 21 600
Inventory at 1 May 2019: raw materials 3 120
work in progress 5 400
finished goods 8 220
Additional information
1 Factory machinery is depreciated at 20% per annum using the reducing balance method.
2 Rent and insurance is to be split equally between the factory and the office.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare Chippo’s manufacturing account for the year ended 30 April 2020.
Chippo
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 30 April 2020
$ $
[10]
© UCLES 2020 0452/21/M/J/20 [Turn over
12
(b) Prepare Chippo’s income statement (trading account section) for the year ended
30 April 2020.
Chippo
Income Statement (Trading Account section) for the year ended 30 April 2020
$ $
[4]
(c) Complete the table by placing a tick (ü) in the correct column, to indicate whether each of the
following actions would increase or decrease Chippo’s gross margin.
Chippo is considering converting her sole trader business into a limited company because she
thinks that this will make it easier for her to obtain finance for future expansion.
REQUIRED
(d) Advise Chippo whether or not she should convert her business to a limited company, in order
to obtain finance. Justify your answer by providing advantages and disadvantages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 20]
She provided the following information about her three types of inventory at 31 March 2020.
REQUIRED
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
Rani later discovered that she had an amount of inventory of item D at 31 March 2020. This
inventory originally cost $1660. She considered this inventory to be obsolete.
REQUIRED
(b) Explain to Rani how the value of the inventory of item D affected the profit for the year ended
31 March 2020.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Advise Rani whether or not she should stop purchasing item D to avoid having obsolete
inventory in the future. Justify your answer by providing advantages and disadvantages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
Rani earns advertising income by placing advertising boards in her shop window. The
following details relate to her advertising income.
On 1 April 2019 Rani had received $420 in advance, and $300 was owed to her.
During the year ended 31 March 2020, Rani received cheque payments totalling $6000. She
decided to write off the amount of $300 due to her.
On 31 March 2020 Rani had received $500 in advance, and $400 was owed to her.
REQUIRED
(d) Prepare the advertising income account in the ledger of Rani for the year ended 31 March
2020. Balance the account and bring down the balances on 1 April 2020.
Rani
Advertising income account
(e) Explain to Rani the effect on gross profit of recording sales of inventory as advertising income.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 20]
The company’s retained earnings at 1 May 2019 were $14 000. The general reserve was $35 000.
During the year ended 30 April 2020 the following took place.
1 The company made a profit for the year of $28 000 after charging debenture interest.
3 A dividend of $4500 was paid. No other dividends were payable for the year.
$
Fixtures and equipment at book value 152 000
Motor vehicles at book value 60 400
Inventory 30 330
Bank overdraft 6 200
Trade payables 24 900
Trade receivables 31 500
Provision for doubtful debts 630
5% Debentures (repayable 2025) 20 000
Ordinary share capital 150 000
REQUIRED
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Prepare the statement of financial position for MPT Limited at 30 April 2020.
MPT Limited
Statement of Financial Position at 30 April 2020
$ $ $
[7]
The directors of MPT Limited are considering using the general reserve to repay the bank
overdraft.
REQUIRED
(c) State why it is not appropriate to use the general reserve to repay the bank overdraft.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Calculate the return on capital employed (ROCE) for the year ended 30 April 2020. The
calculation should be correct to two decimal places and should be based on closing capital
employed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
The directors are considering increasing dividend in 2021 as a way of increasing return on capital
employed (ROCE).
REQUIRED
(e) Advise the directors how the return on capital employed (ROCE) can be increased. Justify
your answer by commenting on both profit and capital employed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/21
Paper 2 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 120
Published
Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.
This mark scheme is published to support teachers and students and should be read together with the
question paper. It shows the requirements of the exam. The answer column of the mark scheme shows the
proposed basis on which Examiners would award marks for this exam. Where appropriate, this column also
provides the most likely acceptable alternative responses expected from students. Examiners usually review
the mark scheme after they have seen student responses and update the mark scheme if appropriate. In the
June series, Examiners were unable to consider the acceptability of alternative responses, as there were no
student responses to consider.
Mark schemes should usually be read together with the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. However,
because students did not sit exam papers, there is no Principal Examiner Report for Teachers for the June
2020 series.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.
These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.
Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.
Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.
Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).
Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.
1(a) $ $ 4
Sales 10 542 (2)CF/(1)OF
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 900 *
Purchases 7 600
8 500
Less Closing inventory 970 *(1) 7 530 (1)OF
Gross profit 3 012
(1) Dates
$ $
Alternative presentation
$ $
1(d) 3
Receipts and payments account Income and expenditure account
Includes all money received and paid Includes income and expenses (1)
No adjustment made for accruals or Adjustments made for accruals and (1)
prepayments prepayments
Includes both capital and revenue items Balancing figure represents surplus/deficit (1)
2(a) Ame 6
Trial Balance at 31 March 2020
Debit Credit
$ $
Capital 10 369 }
Drawings 4 000 }(1)
Equipment at cost 15 500 }
Provision for depreciation of equipment 3 100 }(1)
Inventory at 1 April 2019 1 765
Trade receivables 1 290
Bank overdraft 475 (1)
Trade payables 1 600
Sales 31 250
Purchases 18 330
Purchases returns 910 }(1)
Carriage inwards 640 }
Discount received 815 }
Commission receivable 1 500 }(1)
Rent and Insurance 5 700
Office expenses 2 425
Suspense 369
50 019 50 019 (1)OF
2(b) 9
Account $ Account $
No entry had been made for cash sales, $60. Cash 60 Sales 60
The purchases journal total for March 2020 was Suspense 486 (1) Purchases 486 (1)
$2165. This amount was incorrectly recorded in
the purchases account as $2651.
An insurance payment, $375, had been correctly Rent and 375 (1) Suspense 375 (1)
recorded in the cash book but no other entry has insurance
been made.
The purchase of equipment, $800, was correctly Equipment 800 (1) Office expenses 800 (1)
recorded in the cash book but debited to the
office expenses account.
2(c) Ame 5
Suspense account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2020 2020
Mar 31 Difference on trial balance (1) OF 369 Mar 31 Office expenses (1) 240
855 855
3(a) Chippo 10
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 30 April 2020
$ $
Cost of material consumed
Opening inventory of raw material 3 120
Purchases of raw material 46 500
49 620
Less Closing inventory of raw material 3 000 46 620 (1)
Direct wages 38 250 (1)
Direct expenses – royalties 7 690 (1)
Prime cost 92 560 (1)OF
Factory overheads
Wages – factory supervisor 28 500 (1)
Factory general expenses 4 500
Factory fuel and power 5 325
Rent and insurance (28 000 × 50%) 14 000 (1)
Depreciation of machinery (60 000 – 21 600) × 20% 7 680 (1) 60 005
152 565 (1)OF
Add opening work in progress 5 400 *
157 965
Less closing work in progress 5 590 *(1) both
Cost of production 152 375 (1) OF
3(b) Chippo 4
Income Statement (Trading Account section) for the year ended 30 April 2020
$ $
Revenue 254 000
Less Cost of sales
Opening inventory of finished goods 8 220
Cost of production 152 375 (1)OF
Purchases of finished goods 59 000 (1)
219 595
Less Closing inventory of finished goods 7 885 211 710 (1) OF
Gross profit 42 290 (1)OF
3(c) 2
Action Increase gross profit Decrease gross profit
3(d) Advantages 4
A manufacturing business such as Chippo’s, which requires machinery as well as premises, would usually operate as a
limited company (1)
Chippo would be able to raise some money by issuing shares (1)
It may be easier for Chippo to obtain finance for the proposed expansion if the business is a limited company (1)
If Chippo converts the business to a limited company, her personal assets will be safer (1)
If Chippo continues to manufacture as a sole trader, the lender could take her personal assets if the assets of the business
were insufficient to cover any loans (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Disadvantages
The lender is likely to require security over the company’s assets (1)
The lender could take possession of the assets of the business if payments were not made in accordance with the agreed
terms (1)
There will be costs involved in setting up and running a limited company (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
4(a) 4
Item Net realisable Lower of cost and Number of units
value net realisable Total value
value
$ $ $
B 19 – 1 = 18 18 85 1 530 (1)
C 16 – 2 = 14 14 90 1 260 (1)
4(b) The net realisable value is lower than the cost so item D should be recorded at its net realisable of zero (1) 2
There will be no effect on profit (1)
4(c) Advantages 5
The obsolete inventory is a loss to Rani’s business (1)
She will wish to avoid such losses in the future (1)
Holding inventory necessitates storage costs (1)
If Rani stops buying item D, she may have funds available for other business opportunities (1)
Rani had difficulty in monitoring four types of inventory (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Disadvantages
Rani needs to consider that it may be risky to stock only three of the four lines of inventory in the future (1)
There may be customer demand in future for item D (1)
Customers who have to start buying item D from another supplier may also buy items A, B and C from them (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
4(d) Rani 7
Advertising income account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2019 2019
Apl 1 Balance b/d *(1) 300 Apl 1 Balance b/d* 420
2020 2020
Mar 31 Income statement (1)OF 6 320 Mar 31 Bank (1) 6 000
Balance c/d 500 Irrecoverable debts (1) 300
Balance c/d 400
7 120 7 120
2020 2020
Apl 1 Balance b/d (1) 400 Apl 1 Balance b/d (1) 500
(1) Dates
* mark for both balances
4(e) Sales of inventory are included in calculation of the gross profit (1) 2
Advertising income is included as other income after the calculation of the gross profit (1)
If sales of inventory are included as advertising income the gross profit will be understated (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
5(a) $ $ 3
Retained earnings 1 May 2019 14 000 }
Profit for the year 28 000 } (1)
42 000
Less Transfer to general reserve 5 000 }
Dividend 4 500 }(1) 9 500
Retained earnings 30 April 2020 32 500 (1) OF
$ $
Assets
Non-current Assets
Fixtures and equipment at book value 152 000
Motor vehicles at book value 60 400
212 400 (1)
Current Assets
Inventory 30 330
Trade receivables 31 500
Less Provision for doubtful debts 630 30 870 (1)
61 200 (1)OF
Total assets 273 600
Non-current Liabilities
5% Debentures 20 000 (1)
Current Liabilities
Trade payables 24 900
Bank 6 200
31 100 (1)
Total Equity and Liabilities 273 600
5(c) General reserves may not necessarily be matched by cash balances (1) 1
5(d) Either 4
29 000 100
= ×
242 500 1
= 11.96% (1)OF
Or
= 11.96% (1)OF
Ways to reduce capital employed – Increase dividend (so reducing reserves) (1)
Reduce non-current liabilities (1)
Max (2)
Ways to use capital employed more effectively – combine lower costs with higher sales (1)
sell off surplus/inefficient assets that generate little revenue/increase costs (1)
Max (2)
Max (5)
ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper May/June 2020
1 hour 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
1 Bilal is a trader. He buys goods on credit and for cash. He sells goods on a cash basis only.
April 4 Bought goods on credit from Milly, list price $320, subject to a trade discount of 20%
8 Cash sales, $280, were paid immediately into Bilal’s bank account
13 Bought goods on credit, $250, from Todd who offers 4% cash discount for payments
made within 14 days
21 Paid by cheque for the goods purchased from Todd on 13 April after deducting the cash
discount
24 Paid $485 to EHL Limited by telephone transfer, having deducted 3% cash discount
REQUIRED
Total the journal and indicate the ledger account to which the total would be posted.
Bilal
Purchases journal
Date Details $ $
[4]
Balance the cash book and bring down the balances on 1 May 2020.
© UCLES 2020
Date Details Discount Cash Bank Date Details Discount Cash Bank
allowed received
2020 $ $ $ 2020 $ $ $
April 1 Balance b/d ................ 160 1960 ........... ......................................... ............... ............... …...........
........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
.......... ....................................... ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... .......... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
3
........... ........................................ ................ ............... .............. ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
0452/22/M/J/20
.......... ....................................... ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... .............. ...............
.
.......... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... …....... ......................................... ............... .............. ...............
…....... …..................................... …............ …............ …............ …....... …..................................... ............... …........... …...........
……… …..................................... …............ …........... …........... …....... …..................................... …............ …........... …...........
……… …..................................... …............ …........... …........... …....... …..................................... …............ …........... …...........
[12]
[Turn over
4
(c) Name one accounting principle applied by Bilal in each of the following situations.
accounting principle
The double entry for the posting of the purchases journal
entries is completed by posting the individual amounts to
the purchases ledger.
The purchase of goods on 5 April did not include goods
costing $55 which Bilal bought for his own use.
The stationery purchased on 6 April had been recycled.
This is expected to improve the reputation of the business.
Reputation is not recorded in the accounting statements.
The value of office equipment shown in the financial
statements was based on its purchase price.
[4]
[Total: 20]
2 The K Music Club provides facilities for listening to music and also provides a refreshment bar for
members. The club had the following assets and liabilities at 1 April 2019.
$
Subscriptions in advance 250
Subscriptions in arrears 845
Cash at bank 1 570
Cash in hand 130
Wages outstanding (refreshment bar) 140
Inventory (refreshment bar) 615
Fixtures and fittings at book value 11 200
REQUIRED
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) State how the accumulated fund of a club is built up over time.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
The following information is available for the year ended 31 March 2020.
$
Subscriptions received (all by cheque) 8 500
Subscriptions written off as irrecoverable 155
Wages paid to refreshments bar staff 1 250
REQUIRED
(c) Calculate the refreshment bar staff wages for the year ended 31 March 2020.
...................................................................................................................................................
(d) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 31 March 2020. Balance the account
and bring down the balances on 1 April 2020.
K Music Club
Subscriptions account
Date Details $ Date Details $
[7]
(e) Advise the club treasurer whether or not club members should be required to pay their
subscriptions by direct debit. Justify your answer by providing two advantages and two
disadvantages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
3 Gok is a wholesaler. He prepares his financial statements to the end of February each year.
$
Revenue 420 000
Purchases 311 400
Sales returns 12 000
Discount allowed 9 000
Wages 12 360
Rent and rates 11 750
General expenses 4 220
Irrecoverable debts 8 600
Insurance 4 500
Telephone expenses 4 565
Inventory at 1 March 2019 26 700
Drawings 9 500
Fixtures and equipment at cost 120 000
Provision for depreciation of fixtures and equipment 43 200
Additional information
1 Gok did not have time to count and value his inventory at 29 February 2020. His margin is
25%.
2 A loan of $60 000 was obtained from the bank on 1 July 2019. Interest is charged at 7% per
annum.
3 The fixtures and equipment are being depreciated at 20% per annum using the reducing
balance method.
4 The insurance includes $1500 which covers the period from 1 March to 30 September 2020.
5 Drawings include a payment of $1660 for Gok’s personal telephone expenses. One quarter
of this amount was for business use.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare Gok’s income statement for the year ended 29 February 2020.
Gok
Income Statement for the year ended 29 February 2020
$ $
……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….
[15]
The wages paid by Gok are to his part-time warehouse assistant, Aiman.
REQUIRED
(b) Advise Gok whether or not he should offer Aiman a partnership in the business. Justify your
answer with two advantages and two disadvantages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
4 Nadia is a trader. Her financial year ends on 31 March. She extracted a trial balance at 31 March
2020. The debit and credit totals did not agree. The difference was entered into a suspense
account.
After Nadia prepared draft financial statements, she discovered the following errors.
2 $13 for discount allowed in February 2020 had been credited to the discount allowed account
as $15.
3 A payment for insurance, $220, was correctly recorded in the cash book, but was recorded as
$202 in the insurance account.
4 Commission received, $65, had been debited to the account for commission payable. The
entry to the cash book had been correctly made.
5 Cash drawings, $85, were correctly entered in the cash book but were credited to the
drawings account.
6 The cost of a vehicle repair, $190, had been debited to the motor vehicles account.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the suspense account. Include the original difference on the trial balance as a
balancing figure.
Nadia
Suspense account
(i) Error 6
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Error 7
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Complete the following statement to show the effect on the profit for the year of correcting
errors 2–7. If there is no effect on profit write ‘nil’ in the ‘no effect’ column. Calculate the
corrected profit for the year. Ignore depreciation of non-current assets.
Nadia
Statement of corrected profit for the year ended 31 March 2020
$
Draft profit for the year before corrections 6720
No Increase Decrease
Effect in profit in profit
$ $
Error 1 110
At 31 March 2020 Nadia’s trade receivables owed $14 500. After the preparation of the draft
financial statements for the year ended 31 March 2020, Nadia discovered the following.
REQUIRED
(d) Prepare journal entries to record 1 and 2 above. Narratives are not required.
Nadia
Journal
[4]
[Total: 20]
At 30 April 2020:
Inventory 11 050
Trade receivables 28 700
Bank overdraft 6 280
REQUIRED
[5]
The rate of inventory turnover for the year ended 30 April 2020 was lower than that of the previous
year.
The trade receivables turnover (days) for the year ended 30 April 2020 was higher than that of the
previous year.
REQUIRED
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
The directors are concerned about the level of trade receivables. They are considering introducing
cash discount of 1% for payment within 21 days or charging interest on amounts outstanding after
30 days.
REQUIRED
(c) Advise the directors whether they should introduce the cash discount policy or the interest
charge policy. Justify your answer by providing one advantage and one disadvantage of
each policy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
The information in the accounting statements is affected by the company’s accounting policies.
REQUIRED
(d) Explain to the directors of JKY Limited the importance of the following objectives in selecting
the company’s accounting policies.
(i) comparability
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) relevance
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 20]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 120
Published
Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.
This mark scheme is published to support teachers and students and should be read together with the
question paper. It shows the requirements of the exam. The answer column of the mark scheme shows the
proposed basis on which Examiners would award marks for this exam. Where appropriate, this column also
provides the most likely acceptable alternative responses expected from students. Examiners usually review
the mark scheme after they have seen student responses and update the mark scheme if appropriate. In the
June series, Examiners were unable to consider the acceptability of alternative responses, as there were no
student responses to consider.
Mark schemes should usually be read together with the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. However,
because students did not sit exam papers, there is no Principal Examiner Report for Teachers for the June
2020 series.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.
These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.
Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.
Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.
Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).
Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.
1(a) Bilal 4
Purchases journal
Date Details $
2020
April 4 Milly (320 – 64) 256 (1)
5 EHL Limited 500 (1)
13 Todd 250 (1)
30 Transfer to purchases account 1 006 (1)OF
1(b) Bilal 12
Cash Book
Disc. Cash Bank Disc. Cash Bank
Alld Recd
$ $ $ $ $ $
2020 2020
Apr 1 Balance b/d 160 1 960 Apr 6 Stationery (1) 145
8 Sales (1) 280 10 Milly (1) 128
12 Sales (1) 110 17 Office equip. (1) 500
28 Disposal (1) 50 21 Todd (1) 10 240
24 EHL Limited (1) 15 485
30 Balance c/d 192 870
320 2 240 25(1) 320 2 240
2020
May 1 Balance b/d 192 870
(1)OF (1)OF
Dates (1)
1(c) 4
accounting principle
The double entry for the posting of the purchases journal duality (1)
entries is completed by posting the individual amounts to
the purchases ledger.
The purchase of goods on 5 April did not include goods business entity (1)
costing $55 which Bilal bought for his own use.
The stationery purchased on 6 April had been recycled. This money measurement (1)
is expected to improve the reputation of the business.
Reputation is not recorded in the accounting statements.
The value of office equipment shown in the financial historic cost (1)
statements was based on its purchase price.
2(a) $ $ 4
Subscriptions in arrears 845 (1)
Cash at bank 1 570
Cash in hand 130
Inventory 615
Fixtures and fittings 11 200
14 360 (1)
Subscriptions in advance 250
Wages outstanding 140 390 (1)
Accumulated fund 13 970 (1)(OF)
2(b) The accumulated fund is built up from the annual surpluses (1) less any annual deficits (1) 2
Accept other valid points
2019 $ 2019 $
Apr 1 Balance b/d 845 (1) Apr 1 Balance b/d 250 (1)
2020 2020
Mar 31 Income and Expenditure 8 820 (1)OF Mar 31 Bank 8 500 (1)
Balance c/d 215 Irrecoverable debts 155 (1)
Balance c/d 975
9 880 9 880
2020 2020
Apl 1 Balance b/d 975 (1)OF Apl 1 Balance b/d 215 (1)OF
2(e) Advantages 5
Subscriptions in arrears have risen from $845 to $975, so this may be a concern (1)
Subscriptions in arrears are significantly higher than subscriptions in advance (1)
Irrecoverable debts would be minimised particularly if the direct debits were set up for the start of the year (1)
The timing of cash receipts from members will be known (1)
Administration costs may be reduced (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Disadvantages
Members may prefer to choose their own method of payment (1)
They may prefer to pay their subscription at a time of their choosing (1)
Some members may decide not to renew their membership (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
3(a) Gok 15
Income Statement for the year ended 29 February 2020
$ $
Less Expenses
Discount allowed 9 000 (1)
Wages 12 360 }
Rent and rates 11 750 }(1)
General expenses 4 220 }
Irrecoverable debts 8 600 (1)
Insurance (4 500 – 1 500) 3 000 (1)
Telephone expenses (4 565(1) + [1 660/4] (1)) 4 980
Depreciation on Fixtures and equipment (20% × 76 800) (1) 15 360 (1)OF 69 270
Profit from operations 32 730
Loan interest (60 000 × 7%)(1) × 8/12(1) 2 800
Profit for the year 29 930 (1)OF
3(b) Advantages 5
Gok would no longer need to pay wages to Aiman as he would not be an employee (1)
Aiman may invest capital into the business (1)
Gok would consider how much capital would be introduced by Aiman (1)
The risks and responsibilities would be shared with Aiman (1)
Aiman may have skills which could be used in the business, other than those which he currently uses as a warehouse
assistant (1)
Aiman may be prepared to work longer hours in the business if he became a partner (1)
Currently Gok has not had time to carry out an inventory count so it seems that any extra hours which Aiman may work would
be helpful (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Disadvantages
Gok would no longer be able to take all the decisions on his own (1)
Aiman would be entitled to a share of the profits (1)
Gok would consider how profits and losses are to be shared (1)
Aiman would expect to take drawings from the business (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
4(a) Nadia 7
Suspense account
2020 $ 2020 $
Mar 31 Purchases 110 (1) Mar 31 Difference on trial balance 24 (1)OF
Commission payable 65 (1) Discount allowed 28 (1)
Insurance 18 (1)
Commission receivable 65 (1) Drawings 170 (1)
240 240
4(c) 7
Nadia
Statement of corrected profit for the year ended 31 March 2020
$
Profit for the year before corrections 6720
No Increase Decrease
effect in profit in profit
$ $
Error 1 110
Error 2 28 (1)
Error 3 18 (1)
Error 4 130 (1)
Error 5 nil (1)
Error 6 190 (1)
Error 7 nil (1) ___ ___ 4(1)(OF)
Corrected profit for the year 240 236 6724
4(d) Nadia 4
Journal
Debit Credit
Date Details
$ $
2020
March 31 Irrecoverable debts 300 (1)
DD Supplies 300 (1)
28 700 365
× (1) whole formula = 50 days (1)OF
209 510 1
Interest
Advantages More cash may be received (1)
Cash may be received earlier (1)
Interest received will increase profit (1)
Irrecoverable debts may be reduced (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)
Disadvantages Customer relationships may worsen (1)
Increased administration costs (1)
Customers may refuse to pay the interest (1)
Customers may find an alternative supplier (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)
Recommendation (1)
5(d)(i) Accounting policies should be applied consistently so that financial statements can be compared from year to year (1) 2
Financial statements can be compared with similar businesses (1)
Any change in the company’s accounting policies, and the effect of the change, should be disclosed (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
5(d)(ii) Information is relevant if it is capable of influencing the decisions being made (1) 2
Information must be available in time for decisions to be taken (1)
Relevant information helps the directors to evaluate past, present and future events (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
ACCOUNTING 0452/23
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper May/June 2020
1 hour 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
DC (DH) 198491
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2
1 Bilal is a trader. He buys goods on credit and for cash. He sells goods on a cash basis only.
April 4 Bought goods on credit from Milly, list price $320, subject to a trade discount of 20%
8 Cash sales, $280, were paid immediately into Bilal’s bank account
13 Bought goods on credit, $250, from Todd who offers 4% cash discount for payments
made within 14 days
21 Paid by cheque for the goods purchased from Todd on 13 April after deducting the cash
discount
24 Paid $485 to EHL Limited by telephone transfer, having deducted 3% cash discount
REQUIRED
Total the journal and indicate the ledger account to which the total would be posted.
Bilal
Purchases journal
Date Details $ $
[4]
Balance the cash book and bring down the balances on 1 May 2020.
© UCLES 2020
Date Details Discount Cash Bank Date Details Discount Cash Bank
allowed received
2020 $ $ $ 2020 $ $ $
April 1 Balance b/d ................ 160 1960 ........... ......................................... ............... ............... …...........
........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
.......... ....................................... ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... .......... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
3
........... ........................................ ................ ............... .............. ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
0452/23/M/J/20
.......... ....................................... ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... .............. ...............
.
.......... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... …....... ......................................... ............... .............. ...............
…....... …..................................... …............ …............ …............ …....... …..................................... ............... …........... …...........
……… …..................................... …............ …........... …........... …....... …..................................... …............ …........... …...........
……… …..................................... …............ …........... …........... …....... …..................................... …............ …........... …...........
[12]
[Turn over
4
(c) Name one accounting principle applied by Bilal in each of the following situations.
accounting principle
The double entry for the posting of the purchases journal
entries is completed by posting the individual amounts to
the purchases ledger.
The purchase of goods on 5 April did not include goods
costing $55 which Bilal bought for his own use.
The stationery purchased on 6 April had been recycled.
This is expected to improve the reputation of the business.
Reputation is not recorded in the accounting statements.
The value of office equipment shown in the financial
statements was based on its purchase price.
[4]
[Total: 20]
2 The K Music Club provides facilities for listening to music and also provides a refreshment bar for
members. The club had the following assets and liabilities at 1 April 2019.
$
Subscriptions in advance 250
Subscriptions in arrears 845
Cash at bank 1 570
Cash in hand 130
Wages outstanding (refreshment bar) 140
Inventory (refreshment bar) 615
Fixtures and fittings at book value 11 200
REQUIRED
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) State how the accumulated fund of a club is built up over time.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
The following information is available for the year ended 31 March 2020.
$
Subscriptions received (all by cheque) 8 500
Subscriptions written off as irrecoverable 155
Wages paid to refreshments bar staff 1 250
REQUIRED
(c) Calculate the refreshment bar staff wages for the year ended 31 March 2020.
...................................................................................................................................................
(d) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 31 March 2020. Balance the account
and bring down the balances on 1 April 2020.
K Music Club
Subscriptions account
Date Details $ Date Details $
[7]
(e) Advise the club treasurer whether or not club members should be required to pay their
subscriptions by direct debit. Justify your answer by providing two advantages and two
disadvantages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
3 Gok is a wholesaler. He prepares his financial statements to the end of February each year.
$
Revenue 420 000
Purchases 311 400
Sales returns 12 000
Discount allowed 9 000
Wages 12 360
Rent and rates 11 750
General expenses 4 220
Irrecoverable debts 8 600
Insurance 4 500
Telephone expenses 4 565
Inventory at 1 March 2019 26 700
Drawings 9 500
Fixtures and equipment at cost 120 000
Provision for depreciation of fixtures and equipment 43 200
Additional information
1 Gok did not have time to count and value his inventory at 29 February 2020. His margin is
25%.
2 A loan of $60 000 was obtained from the bank on 1 July 2019. Interest is charged at 7% per
annum.
3 The fixtures and equipment are being depreciated at 20% per annum using the reducing
balance method.
4 The insurance includes $1500 which covers the period from 1 March to 30 September 2020.
5 Drawings include a payment of $1660 for Gok’s personal telephone expenses. One quarter
of this amount was for business use.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare Gok’s income statement for the year ended 29 February 2020.
Gok
Income Statement for the year ended 29 February 2020
$ $
……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….
[15]
The wages paid by Gok are to his part-time warehouse assistant, Aiman.
REQUIRED
(b) Advise Gok whether or not he should offer Aiman a partnership in the business. Justify your
answer with two advantages and two disadvantages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
4 Nadia is a trader. Her financial year ends on 31 March. She extracted a trial balance at 31 March
2020. The debit and credit totals did not agree. The difference was entered into a suspense
account.
After Nadia prepared draft financial statements, she discovered the following errors.
2 $13 for discount allowed in February 2020 had been credited to the discount allowed account
as $15.
3 A payment for insurance, $220, was correctly recorded in the cash book, but was recorded as
$202 in the insurance account.
4 Commission received, $65, had been debited to the account for commission payable. The
entry to the cash book had been correctly made.
5 Cash drawings, $85, were correctly entered in the cash book but were credited to the
drawings account.
6 The cost of a vehicle repair, $190, had been debited to the motor vehicles account.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the suspense account. Include the original difference on the trial balance as a
balancing figure.
Nadia
Suspense account
(i) Error 6
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Error 7
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Complete the following statement to show the effect on the profit for the year of correcting
errors 2–7. If there is no effect on profit write ‘nil’ in the ‘no effect’ column. Calculate the
corrected profit for the year. Ignore depreciation of non-current assets.
Nadia
Statement of corrected profit for the year ended 31 March 2020
$
Draft profit for the year before corrections 6720
No Increase Decrease
Effect in profit in profit
$ $
Error 1 110
At 31 March 2020 Nadia’s trade receivables owed $14 500. After the preparation of the draft
financial statements for the year ended 31 March 2020, Nadia discovered the following.
REQUIRED
(d) Prepare journal entries to record 1 and 2 above. Narratives are not required.
Nadia
Journal
[4]
[Total: 20]
At 30 April 2020:
Inventory 11 050
Trade receivables 28 700
Bank overdraft 6 280
REQUIRED
[5]
The rate of inventory turnover for the year ended 30 April 2020 was lower than that of the previous
year.
The trade receivables turnover (days) for the year ended 30 April 2020 was higher than that of the
previous year.
REQUIRED
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
The directors are concerned about the level of trade receivables. They are considering introducing
cash discount of 1% for payment within 21 days or charging interest on amounts outstanding after
30 days.
REQUIRED
(c) Advise the directors whether they should introduce the cash discount policy or the interest
charge policy. Justify your answer by providing one advantage and one disadvantage of
each policy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
The information in the accounting statements is affected by the company’s accounting policies.
REQUIRED
(d) Explain to the directors of JKY Limited the importance of the following objectives in selecting
the company’s accounting policies.
(i) comparability
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) relevance
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 20]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/23
Paper 2 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 120
Published
Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.
This mark scheme is published to support teachers and students and should be read together with the
question paper. It shows the requirements of the exam. The answer column of the mark scheme shows the
proposed basis on which Examiners would award marks for this exam. Where appropriate, this column also
provides the most likely acceptable alternative responses expected from students. Examiners usually review
the mark scheme after they have seen student responses and update the mark scheme if appropriate. In the
June series, Examiners were unable to consider the acceptability of alternative responses, as there were no
student responses to consider.
Mark schemes should usually be read together with the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. However,
because students did not sit exam papers, there is no Principal Examiner Report for Teachers for the June
2020 series.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.
These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.
Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.
Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.
Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).
Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.
1(a) Bilal 4
Purchases journal
Date Details $
2020
April 4 Milly (320 – 64) 256 (1)
5 EHL Limited 500 (1)
13 Todd 250 (1)
30 Transfer to purchases account 1 006 (1)OF
1(b) Bilal 12
Cash Book
Disc. Cash Bank Disc. Cash Bank
Alld Recd
$ $ $ $ $ $
2020 2020
Apr 1 Balance b/d 160 1 960 Apr 6 Stationery (1) 145
8 Sales (1) 280 10 Milly (1) 128
12 Sales (1) 110 17 Office equip. (1) 500
28 Disposal (1) 50 21 Todd (1) 10 240
24 EHL Limited (1) 15 485
30 Balance c/d 192 870
320 2 240 25(1) 320 2 240
2020
May 1 Balance b/d 192 870
(1)OF (1)OF
Dates (1)
1(c) 4
accounting principle
The double entry for the posting of the purchases journal duality (1)
entries is completed by posting the individual amounts to
the purchases ledger.
The purchase of goods on 5 April did not include goods business entity (1)
costing $55 which Bilal bought for his own use.
The stationery purchased on 6 April had been recycled. This money measurement (1)
is expected to improve the reputation of the business.
Reputation is not recorded in the accounting statements.
The value of office equipment shown in the financial historic cost (1)
statements was based on its purchase price.
2(a) $ $ 4
Subscriptions in arrears 845 (1)
Cash at bank 1 570
Cash in hand 130
Inventory 615
Fixtures and fittings 11 200
14 360 (1)
Subscriptions in advance 250
Wages outstanding 140 390 (1)
Accumulated fund 13 970 (1)(OF)
2(b) The accumulated fund is built up from the annual surpluses (1) less any annual deficits (1) 2
Accept other valid points
2019 $ 2019 $
Apr 1 Balance b/d 845 (1) Apr 1 Balance b/d 250 (1)
2020 2020
Mar 31 Income and Expenditure 8 820 (1)OF Mar 31 Bank 8 500 (1)
Balance c/d 215 Irrecoverable debts 155 (1)
Balance c/d 975
9 880 9 880
2020 2020
Apl 1 Balance b/d 975 (1)OF Apl 1 Balance b/d 215 (1)OF
2(e) Advantages 5
Subscriptions in arrears have risen from $845 to $975, so this may be a concern (1)
Subscriptions in arrears are significantly higher than subscriptions in advance (1)
Irrecoverable debts would be minimised particularly if the direct debits were set up for the start of the year (1)
The timing of cash receipts from members will be known (1)
Administration costs may be reduced (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Disadvantages
Members may prefer to choose their own method of payment (1)
They may prefer to pay their subscription at a time of their choosing (1)
Some members may decide not to renew their membership (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
3(a) Gok 15
Income Statement for the year ended 29 February 2020
$ $
Less Expenses
Discount allowed 9 000 (1)
Wages 12 360 }
Rent and rates 11 750 }(1)
General expenses 4 220 }
Irrecoverable debts 8 600 (1)
Insurance (4 500 – 1 500) 3 000 (1)
Telephone expenses (4 565(1) + [1 660/4] (1)) 4 980
Depreciation on Fixtures and equipment (20% × 76 800) (1) 15 360 (1)OF 69 270
Profit from operations 32 730
Loan interest (60 000 × 7%)(1) × 8/12(1) 2 800
Profit for the year 29 930 (1)OF
3(b) Advantages 5
Gok would no longer need to pay wages to Aiman as he would not be an employee (1)
Aiman may invest capital into the business (1)
Gok would consider how much capital would be introduced by Aiman (1)
The risks and responsibilities would be shared with Aiman (1)
Aiman may have skills which could be used in the business, other than those which he currently uses as a warehouse
assistant (1)
Aiman may be prepared to work longer hours in the business if he became a partner (1)
Currently Gok has not had time to carry out an inventory count so it seems that any extra hours which Aiman may work would
be helpful (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Disadvantages
Gok would no longer be able to take all the decisions on his own (1)
Aiman would be entitled to a share of the profits (1)
Gok would consider how profits and losses are to be shared (1)
Aiman would expect to take drawings from the business (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
4(a) Nadia 7
Suspense account
2020 $ 2020 $
Mar 31 Purchases 110 (1) Mar 31 Difference on trial balance 24 (1)OF
Commission payable 65 (1) Discount allowed 28 (1)
Insurance 18 (1)
Commission receivable 65 (1) Drawings 170 (1)
240 240
4(c) 7
Nadia
Statement of corrected profit for the year ended 31 March 2020
$
Profit for the year before corrections 6720
No Increase Decrease
effect in profit in profit
$ $
Error 1 110
Error 2 28 (1)
Error 3 18 (1)
Error 4 130 (1)
Error 5 nil (1)
Error 6 190 (1)
Error 7 nil (1) ___ ___ 4(1)(OF)
Corrected profit for the year 240 236 6724
4(d) Nadia 4
Journal
Debit Credit
Date Details
$ $
2020
March 31 Irrecoverable debts 300 (1)
DD Supplies 300 (1)
28 700 365
× (1) whole formula = 50 days (1)OF
209 510 1
Interest
Advantages More cash may be received (1)
Cash may be received earlier (1)
Interest received will increase profit (1)
Irrecoverable debts may be reduced (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)
Disadvantages Customer relationships may worsen (1)
Increased administration costs (1)
Customers may refuse to pay the interest (1)
Customers may find an alternative supplier (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)
Recommendation (1)
5(d)(i) Accounting policies should be applied consistently so that financial statements can be compared from year to year (1) 2
Financial statements can be compared with similar businesses (1)
Any change in the company’s accounting policies, and the effect of the change, should be disclosed (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
5(d)(ii) Information is relevant if it is capable of influencing the decisions being made (1) 2
Information must be available in time for decisions to be taken (1)
Relevant information helps the directors to evaluate past, present and future events (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
ACCOUNTING 0452/23
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper May/June 2020
1 hour 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
DC (DH) 198491
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2
1 Bilal is a trader. He buys goods on credit and for cash. He sells goods on a cash basis only.
April 4 Bought goods on credit from Milly, list price $320, subject to a trade discount of 20%
8 Cash sales, $280, were paid immediately into Bilal’s bank account
13 Bought goods on credit, $250, from Todd who offers 4% cash discount for payments
made within 14 days
21 Paid by cheque for the goods purchased from Todd on 13 April after deducting the cash
discount
24 Paid $485 to EHL Limited by telephone transfer, having deducted 3% cash discount
REQUIRED
Total the journal and indicate the ledger account to which the total would be posted.
Bilal
Purchases journal
Date Details $ $
[4]
Balance the cash book and bring down the balances on 1 May 2020.
© UCLES 2020
Date Details Discount Cash Bank Date Details Discount Cash Bank
allowed received
2020 $ $ $ 2020 $ $ $
April 1 Balance b/d ................ 160 1960 ........... ......................................... ............... ............... …...........
........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
.......... ....................................... ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... .......... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
........... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
3
........... ........................................ ................ ............... .............. ........... ......................................... ............... ............... ...............
0452/23/M/J/20
.......... ....................................... ................ ............... ............... ........... ......................................... ............... .............. ...............
.
.......... ........................................ ................ ............... ............... …....... ......................................... ............... .............. ...............
…....... …..................................... …............ …............ …............ …....... …..................................... ............... …........... …...........
……… …..................................... …............ …........... …........... …....... …..................................... …............ …........... …...........
……… …..................................... …............ …........... …........... …....... …..................................... …............ …........... …...........
[12]
[Turn over
4
(c) Name one accounting principle applied by Bilal in each of the following situations.
accounting principle
The double entry for the posting of the purchases journal
entries is completed by posting the individual amounts to
the purchases ledger.
The purchase of goods on 5 April did not include goods
costing $55 which Bilal bought for his own use.
The stationery purchased on 6 April had been recycled.
This is expected to improve the reputation of the business.
Reputation is not recorded in the accounting statements.
The value of office equipment shown in the financial
statements was based on its purchase price.
[4]
[Total: 20]
2 The K Music Club provides facilities for listening to music and also provides a refreshment bar for
members. The club had the following assets and liabilities at 1 April 2019.
$
Subscriptions in advance 250
Subscriptions in arrears 845
Cash at bank 1 570
Cash in hand 130
Wages outstanding (refreshment bar) 140
Inventory (refreshment bar) 615
Fixtures and fittings at book value 11 200
REQUIRED
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) State how the accumulated fund of a club is built up over time.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
The following information is available for the year ended 31 March 2020.
$
Subscriptions received (all by cheque) 8 500
Subscriptions written off as irrecoverable 155
Wages paid to refreshments bar staff 1 250
REQUIRED
(c) Calculate the refreshment bar staff wages for the year ended 31 March 2020.
...................................................................................................................................................
(d) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 31 March 2020. Balance the account
and bring down the balances on 1 April 2020.
K Music Club
Subscriptions account
Date Details $ Date Details $
[7]
(e) Advise the club treasurer whether or not club members should be required to pay their
subscriptions by direct debit. Justify your answer by providing two advantages and two
disadvantages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
3 Gok is a wholesaler. He prepares his financial statements to the end of February each year.
$
Revenue 420 000
Purchases 311 400
Sales returns 12 000
Discount allowed 9 000
Wages 12 360
Rent and rates 11 750
General expenses 4 220
Irrecoverable debts 8 600
Insurance 4 500
Telephone expenses 4 565
Inventory at 1 March 2019 26 700
Drawings 9 500
Fixtures and equipment at cost 120 000
Provision for depreciation of fixtures and equipment 43 200
Additional information
1 Gok did not have time to count and value his inventory at 29 February 2020. His margin is
25%.
2 A loan of $60 000 was obtained from the bank on 1 July 2019. Interest is charged at 7% per
annum.
3 The fixtures and equipment are being depreciated at 20% per annum using the reducing
balance method.
4 The insurance includes $1500 which covers the period from 1 March to 30 September 2020.
5 Drawings include a payment of $1660 for Gok’s personal telephone expenses. One quarter
of this amount was for business use.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare Gok’s income statement for the year ended 29 February 2020.
Gok
Income Statement for the year ended 29 February 2020
$ $
……………………………………………………………............ ……………. …………….
[15]
The wages paid by Gok are to his part-time warehouse assistant, Aiman.
REQUIRED
(b) Advise Gok whether or not he should offer Aiman a partnership in the business. Justify your
answer with two advantages and two disadvantages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
4 Nadia is a trader. Her financial year ends on 31 March. She extracted a trial balance at 31 March
2020. The debit and credit totals did not agree. The difference was entered into a suspense
account.
After Nadia prepared draft financial statements, she discovered the following errors.
2 $13 for discount allowed in February 2020 had been credited to the discount allowed account
as $15.
3 A payment for insurance, $220, was correctly recorded in the cash book, but was recorded as
$202 in the insurance account.
4 Commission received, $65, had been debited to the account for commission payable. The
entry to the cash book had been correctly made.
5 Cash drawings, $85, were correctly entered in the cash book but were credited to the
drawings account.
6 The cost of a vehicle repair, $190, had been debited to the motor vehicles account.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the suspense account. Include the original difference on the trial balance as a
balancing figure.
Nadia
Suspense account
(i) Error 6
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Error 7
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Complete the following statement to show the effect on the profit for the year of correcting
errors 2–7. If there is no effect on profit write ‘nil’ in the ‘no effect’ column. Calculate the
corrected profit for the year. Ignore depreciation of non-current assets.
Nadia
Statement of corrected profit for the year ended 31 March 2020
$
Draft profit for the year before corrections 6720
No Increase Decrease
Effect in profit in profit
$ $
Error 1 110
At 31 March 2020 Nadia’s trade receivables owed $14 500. After the preparation of the draft
financial statements for the year ended 31 March 2020, Nadia discovered the following.
REQUIRED
(d) Prepare journal entries to record 1 and 2 above. Narratives are not required.
Nadia
Journal
[4]
[Total: 20]
At 30 April 2020:
Inventory 11 050
Trade receivables 28 700
Bank overdraft 6 280
REQUIRED
[5]
The rate of inventory turnover for the year ended 30 April 2020 was lower than that of the previous
year.
The trade receivables turnover (days) for the year ended 30 April 2020 was higher than that of the
previous year.
REQUIRED
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
The directors are concerned about the level of trade receivables. They are considering introducing
cash discount of 1% for payment within 21 days or charging interest on amounts outstanding after
30 days.
REQUIRED
(c) Advise the directors whether they should introduce the cash discount policy or the interest
charge policy. Justify your answer by providing one advantage and one disadvantage of
each policy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
The information in the accounting statements is affected by the company’s accounting policies.
REQUIRED
(d) Explain to the directors of JKY Limited the importance of the following objectives in selecting
the company’s accounting policies.
(i) comparability
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) relevance
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 20]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/23
Paper 2 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 120
Published
Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.
This mark scheme is published to support teachers and students and should be read together with the
question paper. It shows the requirements of the exam. The answer column of the mark scheme shows the
proposed basis on which Examiners would award marks for this exam. Where appropriate, this column also
provides the most likely acceptable alternative responses expected from students. Examiners usually review
the mark scheme after they have seen student responses and update the mark scheme if appropriate. In the
June series, Examiners were unable to consider the acceptability of alternative responses, as there were no
student responses to consider.
Mark schemes should usually be read together with the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. However,
because students did not sit exam papers, there is no Principal Examiner Report for Teachers for the June
2020 series.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.
These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.
Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.
Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.
Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).
Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.
1(a) Bilal 4
Purchases journal
Date Details $
2020
April 4 Milly (320 – 64) 256 (1)
5 EHL Limited 500 (1)
13 Todd 250 (1)
30 Transfer to purchases account 1 006 (1)OF
1(b) Bilal 12
Cash Book
Disc. Cash Bank Disc. Cash Bank
Alld Recd
$ $ $ $ $ $
2020 2020
Apr 1 Balance b/d 160 1 960 Apr 6 Stationery (1) 145
8 Sales (1) 280 10 Milly (1) 128
12 Sales (1) 110 17 Office equip. (1) 500
28 Disposal (1) 50 21 Todd (1) 10 240
24 EHL Limited (1) 15 485
30 Balance c/d 192 870
320 2 240 25(1) 320 2 240
2020
May 1 Balance b/d 192 870
(1)OF (1)OF
Dates (1)
1(c) 4
accounting principle
The double entry for the posting of the purchases journal duality (1)
entries is completed by posting the individual amounts to
the purchases ledger.
The purchase of goods on 5 April did not include goods business entity (1)
costing $55 which Bilal bought for his own use.
The stationery purchased on 6 April had been recycled. This money measurement (1)
is expected to improve the reputation of the business.
Reputation is not recorded in the accounting statements.
The value of office equipment shown in the financial historic cost (1)
statements was based on its purchase price.
2(a) $ $ 4
Subscriptions in arrears 845 (1)
Cash at bank 1 570
Cash in hand 130
Inventory 615
Fixtures and fittings 11 200
14 360 (1)
Subscriptions in advance 250
Wages outstanding 140 390 (1)
Accumulated fund 13 970 (1)(OF)
2(b) The accumulated fund is built up from the annual surpluses (1) less any annual deficits (1) 2
Accept other valid points
2019 $ 2019 $
Apr 1 Balance b/d 845 (1) Apr 1 Balance b/d 250 (1)
2020 2020
Mar 31 Income and Expenditure 8 820 (1)OF Mar 31 Bank 8 500 (1)
Balance c/d 215 Irrecoverable debts 155 (1)
Balance c/d 975
9 880 9 880
2020 2020
Apl 1 Balance b/d 975 (1)OF Apl 1 Balance b/d 215 (1)OF
2(e) Advantages 5
Subscriptions in arrears have risen from $845 to $975, so this may be a concern (1)
Subscriptions in arrears are significantly higher than subscriptions in advance (1)
Irrecoverable debts would be minimised particularly if the direct debits were set up for the start of the year (1)
The timing of cash receipts from members will be known (1)
Administration costs may be reduced (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Disadvantages
Members may prefer to choose their own method of payment (1)
They may prefer to pay their subscription at a time of their choosing (1)
Some members may decide not to renew their membership (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
3(a) Gok 15
Income Statement for the year ended 29 February 2020
$ $
Less Expenses
Discount allowed 9 000 (1)
Wages 12 360 }
Rent and rates 11 750 }(1)
General expenses 4 220 }
Irrecoverable debts 8 600 (1)
Insurance (4 500 – 1 500) 3 000 (1)
Telephone expenses (4 565(1) + [1 660/4] (1)) 4 980
Depreciation on Fixtures and equipment (20% × 76 800) (1) 15 360 (1)OF 69 270
Profit from operations 32 730
Loan interest (60 000 × 7%)(1) × 8/12(1) 2 800
Profit for the year 29 930 (1)OF
3(b) Advantages 5
Gok would no longer need to pay wages to Aiman as he would not be an employee (1)
Aiman may invest capital into the business (1)
Gok would consider how much capital would be introduced by Aiman (1)
The risks and responsibilities would be shared with Aiman (1)
Aiman may have skills which could be used in the business, other than those which he currently uses as a warehouse
assistant (1)
Aiman may be prepared to work longer hours in the business if he became a partner (1)
Currently Gok has not had time to carry out an inventory count so it seems that any extra hours which Aiman may work would
be helpful (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Disadvantages
Gok would no longer be able to take all the decisions on his own (1)
Aiman would be entitled to a share of the profits (1)
Gok would consider how profits and losses are to be shared (1)
Aiman would expect to take drawings from the business (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
4(a) Nadia 7
Suspense account
2020 $ 2020 $
Mar 31 Purchases 110 (1) Mar 31 Difference on trial balance 24 (1)OF
Commission payable 65 (1) Discount allowed 28 (1)
Insurance 18 (1)
Commission receivable 65 (1) Drawings 170 (1)
240 240
4(c) 7
Nadia
Statement of corrected profit for the year ended 31 March 2020
$
Profit for the year before corrections 6720
No Increase Decrease
effect in profit in profit
$ $
Error 1 110
Error 2 28 (1)
Error 3 18 (1)
Error 4 130 (1)
Error 5 nil (1)
Error 6 190 (1)
Error 7 nil (1) ___ ___ 4(1)(OF)
Corrected profit for the year 240 236 6724
4(d) Nadia 4
Journal
Debit Credit
Date Details
$ $
2020
March 31 Irrecoverable debts 300 (1)
DD Supplies 300 (1)
28 700 365
× (1) whole formula = 50 days (1)OF
209 510 1
Interest
Advantages More cash may be received (1)
Cash may be received earlier (1)
Interest received will increase profit (1)
Irrecoverable debts may be reduced (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)
Disadvantages Customer relationships may worsen (1)
Increased administration costs (1)
Customers may refuse to pay the interest (1)
Customers may find an alternative supplier (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)
Recommendation (1)
5(d)(i) Accounting policies should be applied consistently so that financial statements can be compared from year to year (1) 2
Financial statements can be compared with similar businesses (1)
Any change in the company’s accounting policies, and the effect of the change, should be disclosed (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
5(d)(ii) Information is relevant if it is capable of influencing the decisions being made (1) 2
Information must be available in time for decisions to be taken (1)
Relevant information helps the directors to evaluate past, present and future events (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
ACCOUNTING 0452/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2021
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
Write in soft pencil.
Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
Do not use correction fluid.
Do not write on any bar codes.
You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
The total mark for this paper is 35.
Each correct answer will score one mark.
Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
IB21 06_0452_11/3RP
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2
3 Carl, a trader, took goods from the business for his own use. These goods had cost $100, and
$8 carriage had been paid for them to be delivered to the business.
How would this be recorded in Carl’s accounts in the books of the business?
4 Shula’s financial year ends on 31 March. On 1 April 2021 there was a credit balance of $100 on
Yasmin’s account in Shula’s purchases ledger.
5 Hasina buys radios from Nazneen at a list price of $10 each. Hasina bought 12 radios and was
offered 20% trade discount and 4% cash discount. Two radios were faulty and were returned to
Nazneen.
7 Alisha entered the credit notes she received in March in the correct returns journal.
How was the total of this journal recorded in the ledger at the end of the month?
10 Javid’s sales ledger control account had a debit balance of $12 000. Interest on an overdue
account, $40, and discount allowed, $150, had been omitted.
What was the correct balance on the sales ledger control account?
A to charge the cost of non-current assets against profit in the year of purchase
B to ensure that non-current assets appear at book value in the statement of financial position
C to ensure that the matching principle is applied when preparing financial statements
D to retain cash in the business for replacement of non-current assets
13 Machinery which had cost $6290 was sold for $3100. The disposal account showed a profit on
disposal of $584.
How much was the depreciation up to the date of disposal and on which side of the disposal
account was it recorded?
2020 2020
Dec 31 balance c / d 600 Jan 1 balance b / d 400
Dec 31 bank 3600
Which entry was made in the income statement for the year ended 31 December 2020 for rent
receivable?
A $3400 credit
B $3400 debit
C $3800 credit
D $3800 debit
A cost
B higher of cost and net realisable value
C lower of cost and net realisable value
D net realisable value
A
B
C
D
profit for
gross profit surplus
the year
A
B
C
D
A current assets
B current liabilities
C non-current assets
D non-current liabilities
21 On 1 April 2020 Ahmed had a provision for doubtful debts of $290. The following journal entry
was made on 31 March 2021.
debit credit
$ $
What was the provision for doubtful debts deducted from trade receivables in Ahmed’s statement
of financial position on 31 March 2021?
22 X Limited started the year with an ordinary share capital of $100 000.
23 Which providers of funds to a limited liability company receive a fixed rate of return on their
investment?
A
B
C
D
24 Every member of a sports club is required to pay an annual subscription of $50. The
subscriptions account showed the following.
Subscriptions account
$ $
2020 2020
Jan 1 Balance b / d 350 Dec 31 Bank 10 950
Dec 31 Income and 10 900 Balance c / d 750
expenditure account
Balance c / d 450
11 700 11 700
2021 2021
Jan 1 Balance b / d 750 Jan 1 Balance b / d 450
What was the increase in the number of members in arrears between 1 January and
31 December 2020?
A 2 members
B 6 members
C 8 members
D 17 members
25 Which term is used to describe the surpluses which have been earned by a club over its lifetime?
A accumulated fund
B capital
C retained earnings
D subscriptions
26 Nula provided the following information for the year ended 31 March 2021.
What was the profit or loss for the year ended 31 March 2021?
A $7875 loss
B $7875 profit
C $15 675 loss
D $15 675 profit
27 A trader who does not keep full accounting records was able to supply the following information.
How much were the credit sales for the year ended 31 March 2021?
$ $
revenue 3600
opening inventory 100
purchases 2600
2700
closing inventory 300 2400
gross profit 1200
It was found that the closing inventory should have been $400.
A 6 times
B 8 times
C 9.2 times
D 14.4 times
33 Sabeena runs a retail business. She plans to close her business in a few weeks’ time.
How should her fixtures and fittings be valued in the statement of financial position?
A at book value
B at expected sales value
C at original cost
D at replacement cost
34 Why should a trader match his costs for a financial year with the revenues for the same period?
1 Information in financial statements must be free from material error and bias.
2 Users must be able to identify differences and similarities between information in
different financial statements.
statement 1 statement 2
A comparability understandability
B reliability comparability
C reliability understandability
D understandability reliability
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/11
Paper 1 May/June 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2021 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
1 A 1
2 D 1
3 D 1
4 B 1
5 B 1
6 A 1
7 A 1
8 D 1
9 A 1
10 B 1
11 D 1
12 C 1
13 C 1
14 A 1
15 A 1
16 C 1
17 D 1
18 C 1
19 A 1
20 D 1
21 B 1
22 C 1
23 C 1
24 C 1
25 A 1
26 D 1
27 D 1
28 D 1
29 A 1
30 C 1
31 B 1
32 B 1
33 B 1
34 D 1
35 B 1
ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2021
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
Write in soft pencil.
Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
Do not use correction fluid.
Do not write on any bar codes.
You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
The total mark for this paper is 35.
Each correct answer will score one mark.
Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
IB21 06_0452_12/4RP
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2
4 Abdul buys all his machinery on credit. He provided the following information.
During the year Abdul paid $25 000 to the suppliers of his machinery.
5 Shula’s financial year ends on 31 March. On 1 April 2021 there was a credit balance of $100 on
Yasmin’s account in Shula’s purchases ledger.
6 Hasina buys radios from Nazneen at a list price of $10 each. Hasina bought 12 radios and was
offered 20% trade discount and 4% cash discount. Two radios were faulty and were returned to
Nazneen.
A general journal
B general ledger
C sales journal
D sales ledger
A sale of surplus office equipment on credit to Janet for $230 entered as $320 in both the
disposal account and Janet’s account
B sale of surplus office equipment on credit to Janet for $230 entered in the office equipment
account and Jason’s account
C sale of surplus office equipment on credit to Janet for $230 entered in the sales account and
Janet’s account
D sale of surplus office equipment on credit to Janet for $230 not entered in any accounts
11 A cheque, $85, received from Shakeel, was credited to the account of Shamz.
debit credit
$ $
A bank 85
Shakeel 85
B Shakeel 85
Shamz 85
C Shamz 85
bank 85
D Shamz 85
Shakeel 85
At that date there were unpresented cheques of $385 and uncredited deposits of $255.
A $1330 credit
B $1330 debit
C $1590 credit
D $1590 debit
A cash purchases
B debts written off as irrecoverable
C discount allowed
D goods returned to credit suppliers
14 Javid’s sales ledger control account had a debit balance of $12 000. Interest on an overdue
account, $40, and discount allowed, $150, had been omitted.
What was the correct balance on the sales ledger control account?
16 Nia sold equipment with a net book value of $200. The proceeds of the sale, $250, were credited
to the sales account and debited in the cash book.
What was the effect of this error on Nia’s gross profit and profit for the year?
A overstated 50 overstated 50
B overstated 200 understated 250
C overstated 250 overstated 200
D understated 250 understated 200
A to charge the cost of non-current assets against profit in the year of purchase
B to ensure that non-current assets appear at book value in the statement of financial position
C to ensure that the matching principle is applied when preparing financial statements
D to retain cash in the business for replacement of non-current assets
18 A machine with an original cost of $10 000 had been depreciated for two years at the rate of 10%
per annum using the straight-line basis. It was then sold for cash with the loss on disposal
amounting to $700.
A replacement machine was bought on the same day for $12 400 cash.
19 Why would a bakery business not include a value for inventory of stationery in the statement of
financial position?
20 Shilpa’s financial year ends on 30 April. On 31 March 2021 she wrote off a debt owed by Tahir as
irrecoverable.
debit credit
A cost
B higher of cost and net realisable value
C lower of cost and net realisable value
D net realisable value
1 long-term loan
2 retained earnings
3 trade payables
A current assets
B current liabilities
C non-current assets
D non-current liabilities
26 Ann and Ben are in partnership sharing profits and losses equally.
They provided the following information for the year ended 30 April 2021.
29 Nula provided the following information for the year ended 31 March 2021.
What was the profit or loss for the year ended 31 March 2021?
A $7875 loss
B $7875 profit
C $15 675 loss
D $15 675 profit
$ $
revenue 3600
opening inventory 100
purchases 2600
2700
closing inventory 300 2400
gross profit 1200
It was found that the closing inventory should have been $400.
A 6 times
B 8 times
C 9.2 times
D 14.4 times
32 Sally’s business has reached the overdraft limit set by the bank of $1500 and is not able to pay its
debts when they fall due.
Company X Company Y
A Both companies earned the same amount of profit for the year.
B Company X had a better gross margin than Company Y.
C Company Y had a larger proportion of expenses than Company X.
D The cost of sales of Company X was lower than that of Company Y.
1 Information in financial statements must be free from material error and bias.
2 Users must be able to identify differences and similarities between information in
different financial statements.
statement 1 statement 2
A comparability understandability
B reliability comparability
C reliability understandability
D understandability reliability
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 May/June 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2021 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
1 A 1
2 D 1
3 A 1
4 A 1
5 B 1
6 B 1
7 C 1
8 B 1
9 C 1
10 A 1
11 D 1
12 C 1
13 D 1
14 B 1
15 C 1
16 C 1
17 C 1
18 B 1
19 D 1
20 C 1
21 C 1
22 D 1
23 D 1
24 D 1
25 D 1
26 A 1
27 B 1
28 B 1
29 D 1
30 A 1
31 C 1
32 D 1
33 C 1
34 B 1
35 B 1
ACCOUNTING 0452/13
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2021
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
Write in soft pencil.
Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
Do not use correction fluid.
Do not write on any bar codes.
You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
The total mark for this paper is 35.
Each correct answer will score one mark.
Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
IB21 06_0452_13/FP
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2
4 Abdul buys all his machinery on credit. He provided the following information.
During the year Abdul paid $25 000 to the suppliers of his machinery.
5 Shula’s financial year ends on 31 March. On 1 April 2021 there was a credit balance of $100 on
Yasmin’s account in Shula’s purchases ledger.
6 Hasina buys radios from Nazneen at a list price of $10 each. Hasina bought 12 radios and was
offered 20% trade discount and 4% cash discount. Two radios were faulty and were returned to
Nazneen.
A general journal
B general ledger
C sales journal
D sales ledger
A sale of surplus office equipment on credit to Janet for $230 entered as $320 in both the
disposal account and Janet’s account
B sale of surplus office equipment on credit to Janet for $230 entered in the office equipment
account and Jason’s account
C sale of surplus office equipment on credit to Janet for $230 entered in the sales account and
Janet’s account
D sale of surplus office equipment on credit to Janet for $230 not entered in any accounts
11 A cheque, $85, received from Shakeel, was credited to the account of Shamz.
debit credit
$ $
A bank 85
Shakeel 85
B Shakeel 85
Shamz 85
C Shamz 85
bank 85
D Shamz 85
Shakeel 85
At that date there were unpresented cheques of $385 and uncredited deposits of $255.
A $1330 credit
B $1330 debit
C $1590 credit
D $1590 debit
A cash purchases
B debts written off as irrecoverable
C discount allowed
D goods returned to credit suppliers
14 Javid’s sales ledger control account had a debit balance of $12 000. Interest on an overdue
account, $40, and discount allowed, $150, had been omitted.
What was the correct balance on the sales ledger control account?
16 Nia sold equipment with a net book value of $200. The proceeds of the sale, $250, were credited
to the sales account and debited in the cash book.
What was the effect of this error on Nia’s gross profit and profit for the year?
A overstated 50 overstated 50
B overstated 200 understated 250
C overstated 250 overstated 200
D understated 250 understated 200
A to charge the cost of non-current assets against profit in the year of purchase
B to ensure that non-current assets appear at book value in the statement of financial position
C to ensure that the matching principle is applied when preparing financial statements
D to retain cash in the business for replacement of non-current assets
18 A machine with an original cost of $10 000 had been depreciated for two years at the rate of 10%
per annum using the straight-line basis. It was then sold for cash with the loss on disposal
amounting to $700.
A replacement machine was bought on the same day for $12 400 cash.
19 Why would a bakery business not include a value for inventory of stationery in the statement of
financial position?
20 Shilpa’s financial year ends on 30 April. On 31 March 2021 she wrote off a debt owed by Tahir as
irrecoverable.
debit credit
A cost
B higher of cost and net realisable value
C lower of cost and net realisable value
D net realisable value
1 long-term loan
2 retained earnings
3 trade payables
A current assets
B current liabilities
C non-current assets
D non-current liabilities
26 Ann and Ben are in partnership sharing profits and losses equally.
They provided the following information for the year ended 30 April 2021.
29 Nula provided the following information for the year ended 31 March 2021.
What was the profit or loss for the year ended 31 March 2021?
A $7875 loss
B $7875 profit
C $15 675 loss
D $15 675 profit
$ $
revenue 3600
opening inventory 100
purchases 2600
2700
closing inventory 300 2400
gross profit 1200
It was found that the closing inventory should have been $400.
A 6 times
B 8 times
C 9.2 times
D 14.4 times
32 Sally’s business has reached the overdraft limit set by the bank of $1500 and is not able to pay its
debts when they fall due.
Company X Company Y
A Both companies earned the same amount of profit for the year.
B Company X had a better gross margin than Company Y.
C Company Y had a larger proportion of expenses than Company X.
D The cost of sales of Company X was lower than that of Company Y.
1 Information in financial statements must be free from material error and bias.
2 Users must be able to identify differences and similarities between information in
different financial statements.
statement 1 statement 2
A comparability understandability
B reliability comparability
C reliability understandability
D understandability reliability
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/13
Paper 1 May/June 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2021 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
1 A 1
2 D 1
3 A 1
4 A 1
5 B 1
6 B 1
7 C 1
8 B 1
9 C 1
10 A 1
11 D 1
12 C 1
13 D 1
14 B 1
15 C 1
16 C 1
17 C 1
18 B 1
19 D 1
20 C 1
21 C 1
22 D 1
23 D 1
24 D 1
25 D 1
26 A 1
27 B 1
28 B 1
29 D 1
30 A 1
31 C 1
32 D 1
33 C 1
34 B 1
35 B 1
ACCOUNTING 0452/21
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper May/June 2021
1 hour 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
DC (PQ) 200793/6
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2
1 Rahat is a trader.
March 3 Cash sales, $580, were paid directly into Rahat’s business bank account
27 Sold old office equipment to Burgess, who paid $50 by cheque in full settlement
REQUIRED
© UCLES 2021
allowed received
2021 $ $ $ 2021 $ $ $
March 1 Balance b/d .............. 150 ................ March 1 Balance b/d .............. ................ 1980
.............. ...................................... .............. ................ ................ .............. ...................................... .............. ................ ................
.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............
.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............
.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............
.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............
.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............
3
0452/21/M/J/21
.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............
.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............
.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............
.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............
.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............
.............. ...................................... .............. ............... ............... .............. ...................................... .............. ............... ...............
[11]
[Turn over
4
(b) Complete the following table by placing a tick (3) in the correct column to indicate whether
each item would be used to update the cash book or would appear in the bank reconciliation
statement.
Overdraft interest
Rahat is concerned about the level of her bank overdraft. She is considering applying for a bank
loan. This would enable her to pay off her bank overdraft and to purchase new office furniture.
REQUIRED
(c) Advise Rahat whether she should apply for the bank loan. Justify your answer by providing
two advantages and two disadvantages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
$
Revenue 158 000
Inventory at 1 April 2020 9 400
Purchases 69 200
Rates and insurance 11 250
Wages 10 475
General expenses 9 675
Discount allowed 2 000
Commission receivable 4 800
Balance at bank 4 000
Trade receivables 14 150
Trade payables 5 835
Premises at cost 130 000
Fittings at cost 18 000
Provision for depreciation of fittings 8 100
Loan from John 10 000
Capital accounts
John 75 000
Banu 50 000
Current accounts
John 4 050
Banu 2 365
Drawings
John 19 000
Banu 21 000
Additional information
4 Depreciation on fittings is to be charged at 15% per annum using the straight-line method.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement for John and Banu for the year ended 31 March 2021.
[9]
(b) Prepare the appropriation account for John and Banu for the year ended 31 March 2021.
[5]
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Complete the table by placing a tick (3) against each statement which describes an advantage
to John of being in a partnership with Banu.
Banu may have skills and knowledge which John does not have
John is only liable for business debts up to the amount he agreed to
contribute
Additional finance is available to the business
[Total: 20]
$
Inventory at 1 February 2020
Raw materials 7 500
Work in progress 11 220
Finished goods 925
Purchases
Raw materials 91 400
Finished goods 6 850
Wages
Factory operatives 52 000
Factory supervisor 23 100
Rent and rates 19 620
Insurance 4 600
General factory expenses 4 200
Carriage inwards on raw materials 6 280
Factory equipment at cost 90 000
Provision for depreciation of factory equipment 30 960
Additional information
2 The factory equipment is to be depreciated at 20% per annum using the reducing balance
method.
3 In December 2020, $3600 was paid for rent for the period 1 December 2020 to
28 February 2021.
5 Rent and rates are to be apportioned equally between the factory and the office.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the rent and rates account for TC Limited for the year ended 31 January 2021.
Balance the account and bring down the balances on 1 February 2021.
TC Limited
Rent and rates account
Date Details $ Date Details $
[5]
(b) Prepare the manufacturing account for TC Limited for the year ended 31 January 2021.
TC Limited
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 31 January 2021
$ $
[10]
The directors of TC Limited are considering the purchase of various low-value items of office
equipment.
REQUIRED
(c) Advise the directors whether or not they should charge depreciation on these items.
Justify your answer by providing two advantages and two disadvantages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
Neith
Trial Balance at 31 March 2021
Debit Credit
$ $
Fixtures and equipment at cost 300 000
Provision for depreciation of fixtures and equipment 120 000
Inventory 9 100
Trade receivables 16 100
Provision for doubtful debts 322
Petty cash 100
Bank overdraft 11 400
Trade payables 3 200
Capital at 1 April 2020 160 000
Sales 107 498
Purchases 41 520
Rent and rates 16 000
Office expenses 9 000
General expenses 8 150
Suspense 210 594
506 492 506 492
Additional information
1 The value of inventory on 31 March 2021 was included in the trial balance.
On 1 April 2020 the inventory was valued at $8800.
2 On 30 March 2021, a motor vehicle was sold at book value, $2750. The disposal was
correctly recorded but no entry was made in the account of the purchaser. The purchaser
was expected to pay the amount due on 30 April 2021.
REQUIRED
Neith
Corrected Trial Balance at 31 March 2021
Debit Credit
$ $
____________ ____________
[6]
1 The total of the general expenses column of the petty cash book, $32, for May 2020 had
been posted to the office expenses account.
2 A payment received, $75, from Anya, a credit customer, had been credited to the sales
account.
3 A credit purchase, $120, from Samir had been omitted from the books of account.
4 A cheque payment, $19, for office expenses, had been recorded as $91.
5 An invoice for office cleaning, $235, had been debited to the fixtures and equipment account.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the journal entry to correct each of the above errors. Narratives are not required.
Neith
Journal
Error Details Debit Credit
number $ $
[10]
(c) Complete the table by placing a tick (3) to indicate the effect of correcting each error 2 to 5.
Ignore depreciation of non-current assets.
5
[4]
[Total: 20]
$
For the year ended 30 April 2021
Credit sales 191 000
Credit purchases 120 000
Gross profit 80 220
Commission receivable 20 280
Expenses 29 830
At 30 April 2021
Trade receivables 12 400
Trade payables 7 000
REQUIRED
workings answer
(round up to next
whole day)
workings answer
(round up to next
whole day)
[4]
The year ended 30 April 2021 was Omer’s first year of trading. His main competitor is Ahu who
has been trading for many years. Ahu has established a good reputation.
The following information relates to Ahu’s business for the year ended 30 April 2021.
REQUIRED
(b) (i) Suggest two reasons for the difference in the trade receivables turnover of the two
businesses.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Suggest two reasons for the difference in the trade payables turnover of the two
businesses.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
Omer wants to increase sales and is considering employing a marketing manager who would be
paid $28 000 per annum.
REQUIRED
(c) Advise Omer whether or not he should employ a marketing manager. Justify your answer.
You may include reference to the possible effects on the income and expenses of the
business.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
Omer is concerned that an increase in sales would lead to an increase in irrecoverable debts.
REQUIRED
(d) State three ways by which Omer could reduce the possibility of irrecoverable debts.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
By writing off any irrecoverable debts, Omer would be applying the matching and prudence
principles.
REQUIRED
(e) State why Omer should apply each of the following accounting principles.
Matching
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Prudence
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Consistency
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Business entity
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 20]
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/21
Paper 2 May/June 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2021 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.
Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.
Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.
Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).
Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.
a DO credit answers which are worded differently from the mark scheme if they clearly convey the same meaning (unless the mark scheme
requires a specific term)
b DO credit alternative answers/examples which are not written in the mark scheme if they are correct
c DO credit answers where candidates give more than one correct answer in one prompt/numbered/scaffolded space where extended
writing is required rather than list-type answers. For example, questions that require n reasons (e.g. State two reasons …).
d DO NOT credit answers simply for using a ‘key term’ unless that is all that is required. (Check for evidence it is understood and not used
wrongly.)
e DO NOT credit answers which are obviously self-contradicting or trying to cover all possibilities
f DO NOT give further credit for what is effectively repetition of a correct point already credited unless the language itself is being tested.
This applies equally to ‘mirror statements’ (i.e. polluted/not polluted).
g DO NOT require spellings to be correct, unless this is part of the test. However spellings of syllabus terms must allow for clear and
unambiguous separation from other syllabus terms with which they may be confused (e.g. Corrasion/Corrosion)
4 Annotation:
• For point marking, ticks can be used to indicate correct answers and crosses can be used to indicate wrong answers. There is no direct
relationship between ticks and marks. Ticks have no defined meaning for levels of response marking.
• For levels of response marking, the level awarded should be annotated on the script.
• Other annotations will be used by examiners as agreed during standardisation, and the meaning will be understood by all examiners who
marked that paper.
1(a) Rahat 11
Cash Book
Date Details Disc. Cash Bank Date Details Disc. Cash Bank
2021 $ $ $ 2021 $ $ $
+(1) dates
1(b) 4
Updating cash Bank reconciliation
book statement
1(c) Advantages 5
Loan interest may be lower than overdraft interest (1)
No interest on overdraft to pay (1)
Have a longer time to repay a loan (1)
May improve relationship with bank (1)
Bank balance would be improved/liquidity would be improved (1)
New office furniture should lead to a better working environment (1)
Accept other valid points
(Max 2)
Disadvantages
Loan will have to be repaid (1)
Loan interest will have to be paid (1)
Early repayment may not be allowed (1)
The bank may require security (1)
No income/profit is generated from the office furniture (1)
Accept other valid points
(Max 2)
Recommendation (1)
2(d) 4
Continuity of existence of the business
Banu may have skills and knowledge which John does not have (1)
John is only liable for business debts up to the amount he agreed to contribute
John is bound by the actions of Banu carried out on behalf of the business
John can discuss matters with Banu before making decisions. (1)
3(a) TC Limited 5
Rent and rates account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2021 2021
Jan 31 Total to date (1) 19 620 Jan 31 Manufacturing account (1)OF 9 485
Balance c/d (rates) 550 Income statement (1)OF 9 485
Balance c/d (rent) 1 200
20 170 20 170
Feb 1 Balance b/d (rent) (1) 1 200 Feb 1 Balance b/d (rates) (1) 550
Ignore dates
3(b) TC Limited 10
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 31 January 2021
$ $
Cost of material consumed
Opening inventory of raw material 7 500
Purchases of raw material 91 400
Carriage inwards 6 280 97 680
105 180
Less Closing inventory of raw material 8 000
97 180 (1)
Direct wages 52 000 (1)
Prime cost 149 180 (1) OF
Factory overheads
Wages of factory supervisor 23 100 (1)
Rent and rates 9 485 (1)OF
Insurance (75% × 4 600) 3 450 (1)
General expenses 4 200
Depreciation of factory equipment
(90 000 – 30 960) × 20% 11 808 (1) 52 043
201 223 (1)OF
Add opening work-in-progress 11 220 *
212 443
Less closing work-in-progress 11 900 *
Cost of production 200 543 (1) OF
3(c) Advantages 5
To apply the principle of consistency OR the other non-current assets are depreciated so these should also be depreciated
(1)
To apply the principle of matching OR to spread the cost over expected useful life (1)
Are non-current assets so should be depreciated/they lose value over their useful life so should be depreciated (1)
Accept other valid points
(Max 2)
Disadvantages
The cost of the items may not be material (1)
The amount of depreciation would be insignificant (1)
The items may not last more than one year (1)
Accept other valid points
(Max 2)
Recommendation (1)
4(a) Neith 6
Corrected Trial balance at 31 March 2021
$ $
Fixtures and equipment at cost 300 000
Provision for depreciation of fixtures and equipment 120 000 (1)
Inventory 8 800 (1)
Trade receivables 16 100 (1)
Provision for doubtful debts 322
Petty cash 100
Bank overdraft 11 400 (1)
Trade payables 3 200
Capital at 1 April 2020 160 000
Sales 107 498
Purchases 41 520
Rent and rates 16 000
Office expenses 9 000
General expenses 8 150
Other receivables 2 750 (1)
______ ______
402 420 402 420 (1)both
4(b) Neith 10
Journal
Error number Details Debit Credit
$ $
2 Sales 75 (1)
Anya 75 (1)
4 Bank 72 (1)
Office expenses 72 (1)
4(c) 4
Error number Increases capital Decreases capital No effect on capital
1
2 (1)
3 (1)
4 (1)
5 (1)
5(a) 4
Trade receivables turnover (days)
workings answer
workings answer
Ahu Omer
Allows trade receivables a longer credit period (1) Allows trade receivables a shorter credit period (1)
Has an inefficient credit control system/slower to Has a more efficient credit control system/quicker to
resort to legal action (1) resort to legal action (1)
Offers no cash discount/lower rate of cash discount Offers cash discount/higher rate of cash discount for
for prompt payment (1) prompt payment (1)
Charge no interest/lower rate of interest on overdue Charge interest/higher rate of interest on overdue
Accounts (1) Accounts (1)
Does not make use of invoice discounting and Makes use of invoice discounting and factoring (1)
factoring (1)
Ahu Omer
Is allowed a longer credit period by trade payables(1) Is allowed a shorter credit period by trade payables (1)
Suppliers offer no cash discount/lower rate of cash Suppliers offer cash discount/higher rate of cash
discount for prompt payment (1) discount for prompt payment (1)
Suppliers charge no interest/lower rate of interest on Suppliers charge interest/higher rate of interest on
overdue accounts (1) overdue accounts (1)
Credit customers take longer to pay (1) Credit customers pay more quickly (1)
Has less liquidity/is less able to pay the suppliers (1) Has more liquidity/is more able to pay suppliers (1)
Is a more established customer so suppliers may be Is paying quickly in order to establish a good
more flexible on credit period taken (1) relationship with suppliers (1)
5(c) 5
Advantages of employing marketing manager Disadvantages of employing marketing manager
May increase sales and may increase profit (1) Manager’s salary will increase expenses (1)
May improve business reputation/brand image (1) Increased cost of marketing/marketing expenses (1)
Can utilise experience and skills of manager (1) Manager may not be experienced/effective (1)
May increase market share (1) Increase in sales/profit may be less than salary (1)
(Max 4)
Recommendation (1)
5(e) Matching 4
To ensure that the revenue of the accounting period is matched against the costs of the same period (1)
Prudence
Profit should not be anticipated but all possible losses should be provided for (1)
To ensure that profits and assets are not overstated (1)
To ensure that losses and liabilities are not understated (1)
(Max 1)
Consistency
To ensure that accounting methods are used consistently from one period to the next (1)
To allow comparison of financial statements from year to year (1)
(Max 1)
Business entity
To ensure that the accounting records relate only to the business (1)
To ensure that the business is treated completely separately from the owner of the business (1)
(Max 1)
ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper May/June 2021
1 hour 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
DC (PQ) 200794/3
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2
1 Leo maintains a petty cash book using the imprest system. The imprest amount, which is $200, is
restored on the first day of each month.
All payments of less than $100 are made from petty cash. All cash receipts of less than $100 are
paid into petty cash.
On 1 April 2021 Leo had $48 in his petty cash box. Leo provided the following information for April
2021.
April 1 Restored petty cash imprest from the business bank account
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare Leo’s petty cash book for the month of April 2021, on page 3.
Balance the petty cash book and bring down the balance on 1 May 2021.
© UCLES 2021
received paid expenses accounts
$ 2021 $ $ $ $
0452/22/M/J/21
...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................
[10]
[Turn over
4
(b) (i) Name the ledger to which each of the following would be posted.
(ii) Name the accounting principle which is being applied when figures from the petty cash
book are posted to the appropriate ledgers.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
REQUIRED
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
Leo is considering making all payments over $50 to trade payables by credit transfer.
REQUIRED
(d) Advise Leo whether he should go ahead with this change. Justify your answer by providing
two advantages and two disadvantages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
2 Tej is a trader who sells goods on credit. His year end is 28 February.
Tej provided the following information.
$
At 1 March 2020
Trade receivables 6250
Other receivables (rent prepaid) 300
At 28 February 2021
Trade receivables 7000
The provision for doubtful debts was 4% of trade receivables at 1 March 2020 and 6% of trade
receivables at 28 February 2021.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the rent payable account for the year ended 28 February 2021. Balance the account
and bring down the balance on 1 March 2021.
Tej
Rent payable account
Date Details $ Date Details $
[6]
(b) Prepare the provision for doubtful debts account for the year ended 28 February 2021.
Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 March 2021.
Tej
Provision for doubtful debts account
Date Details $ Date Details $
[4]
(c) Name the accounting principle applied when the income statement is adjusted for rent
prepaid.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) (i) Explain how the realisation principle is applied to the recording of Tej’s credit sales.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain how the prudence principle is applied to the maintenance of Tej’s provision for
doubtful debts.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
Tej sells to a small number of customers. He has good working relationships with them and they
sometimes recommend him to potential customers.
Tej is concerned that his customers are taking a long time to pay him. He is considering charging
interest on overdue accounts.
REQUIRED
(e) Advise Tej whether or not he should charge interest on overdue accounts. Justify your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
HV Limited
Trial Balance at 31 March 2021
Debit Credit
$ $
Revenue 145 000
Inventory at 1 April 2020 5 820
Purchases 64 900
Rent and insurance 9 280
Wages 24 750
Operating expenses 8 500
Fittings at cost 200 000
Provision for depreciation of fittings 72 000
Trade receivables 12 500
Bank 13 765
Trade payables 6 615
4% Debentures (repayable 1 April 2031) 30 000
Ordinary share capital 70 000
Retained earnings 21 500
Dividend paid on ordinary shares 5 600
345 115 345 115
Additional information
2 Depreciation on fittings is to be charged at 20% per annum using the reducing balance
method.
3 Rent includes a payment of $1800 for the 3 months from 1 March 2021 to 31 May 2021.
5 No debenture interest has been paid for the year ended 31 March 2021.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement for HV Limited for the year ended 31 March 2021.
HV Limited
Income Statement for the year ended 31 March 2021
$ $
[8]
(b) Prepare the statement of changes in equity for HV Limited for the year ended 31 March 2021.
HV Limited
Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended 31 March 2021
Details Ordinary General Retained Total
Share reserve earnings
capital
$ $ $ $
[5]
(c) Calculate the return on capital employed for the year ended 31 March 2021.
The answer should be correct to two decimal places.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) State two differences between ordinary shares and preference shares.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 20]
4 RIA Music Club owns its premises where it has a shop and a number of music rooms.
Shop sales are for cash and shop purchases are on credit. Mark-up is 20%.
The treasurer provided the following information.
At At
1 January 31 December
2020 2020
$ $
Subscriptions in advance 1 200 1 050
Subscriptions in arrears 5 215 5 830
Total shop trade payables 4 275 4 990
Shop inventory 2 500 2 500
Balance at bank 240 110
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 31 December 2020. Balance the
account and bring down the balances on 1 January 2021.
[6]
(b) Prepare the total shop trade payables account for the year ended 31 December 2020 to
calculate the amount paid to shop trade payables.
(c) Calculate the revenue from shop sales for the year ended 31 December 2020.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
The treasurer is concerned about the decreasing bank balance and the increase in shop trade
payables. He is looking into the possibility of renting out part of the club premises to an art society
for $400 per month.
REQUIRED
(d) Advise the treasurer whether renting out part of the premises is the most suitable way of
improving cash flow or whether other methods may be more suitable. Justify your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
5 Kia is a trader.
The totals of the trial balance prepared on 30 April 2021 did not agree and the difference was
placed in a suspense account.
Kia later discovered the errors shown in the table in part (a).
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the following table to show the entries required to correct each error.
The first one has been completed as an example.
Cash drawings, $200, had been omitted Drawings 200 Suspense 200
from the drawings account.
Sales returns, $105, had been correctly ................... ............ ................... ............
entered in the customer’s account but
had been credited to the purchases ................... ............ ................... ............
returns account.
[9]
(b) Prepare the suspense account. Include the original difference on the trial balance, as a
balancing figure.
Kia
Suspense account
Date Details $ Date Details $
[5]
(c) The account for Abel in Kia’s books showed that Kia owed him $327 before the errors were
corrected. Calculate the correct amount which Kia owed Abel at 30 April 2021.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
REQUIRED
(d) State three reasons why Kia did not record this as a non-current asset.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 20]
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 May/June 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2021 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.
Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.
Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.
Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).
Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.
a DO credit answers which are worded differently from the mark scheme if they clearly convey the same meaning (unless the mark scheme
requires a specific term)
b DO credit alternative answers/examples which are not written in the mark scheme if they are correct
c DO credit answers where candidates give more than one correct answer in one prompt/numbered/scaffolded space where extended
writing is required rather than list-type answers. For example, questions that require n reasons (e.g. State two reasons …).
d DO NOT credit answers simply for using a ‘key term’ unless that is all that is required. (Check for evidence it is understood and not used
wrongly.)
e DO NOT credit answers which are obviously self-contradicting or trying to cover all possibilities
f DO NOT give further credit for what is effectively repetition of a correct point already credited unless the language itself is being tested.
This applies equally to ‘mirror statements’ (i.e. polluted/not polluted).
g DO NOT require spellings to be correct, unless this is part of the test. However spellings of syllabus terms must allow for clear and
unambiguous separation from other syllabus terms with which they may be confused (e.g. Corrasion/Corrosion)
4 Annotation:
• For point marking, ticks can be used to indicate correct answers and crosses can be used to indicate wrong answers. There is no direct
relationship between ticks and marks. Ticks have no defined meaning for levels of response marking.
• For levels of response marking, the level awarded should be annotated on the script.
• Other annotations will be used by examiners as agreed during standardisation, and the meaning will be understood by all examiners who
marked that paper.
1(a) Leo 10
Petty Cash Book
Total Total Office Ledger
Date Details Travel
received paid expenses accounts
$ 2021 $ $ $ $
13 Hunter (1) 72 72
25 Conrad (1)
120 27 21 72
91
+ (1) dates
+ (1) OF totalling analysis columns
1(d) Advantages 5
Do not need to keep as much cash on the premises (1)
Less risk of theft or fraud (1)
Do not have to have face to face meeting to pay/save time (1)
Or other relevant advantages
Max (2)
Disadvantages
No source document immediately available (1)
Still have to pay amounts below $50 by other methods (1)
May be easier / more suitable to use cheques (1)
May Increase bank charges (1)
Or other relevant disadvantages
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
2(a) Tej 6
Rent payable account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2020 2021
Mar 1 Balance b/d (1) 300 Feb 28 Income Statement (1) 3 900
Jun 30 Bank (1) 1950 Balance c/d 450
Nov 30 Bank (1) 2100
4350 4 350
2021
Mar 1 Balance b/d (1)OF 450
+ (1) dates
2(b) Tej 4
Provision for doubtful debts account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2021 2020
Feb 28 Balance c/d (7 000 × 6%) (1) 420 Mar 1 Balance b/d (6 250 × 4%) (1) 250
2021
Feb 28 Income statement (1)OF 170
420 420
Mar 1 Balance b/d (1)OF 420
Accept ‘Accruals’
2(d)(i) Revenue is regarded as being earned (1) when title to the goods is passed (1) 2
The profit on sales is not recognised until it is earned (1)
Profit is recognised when earned not when payment is received (1)
Profit is earned when the sale is completed/legal title passes (1)
No profit is recognised when goods are ordered (1)
Accept other valid points.
Max (2)
2(e) Advantages 5
Will encourage customers to pay earlier (1)
May increase liquidity/cash flow (1)
May reduce administration time/costs (1)
Or other relevant advantages
Max (2)
Disadvantages
Good relationships with customers will be damaged (1)
May lose customers/sales may reduce (1)
May incur extra costs to attract customers/advertising/marketing (1)
Or other relevant disadvantages
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
3(a) HV Limited 8
Income Statement for the year ended 31 March 2021
$ $
Revenue 145 000
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 5 820
Purchases 64 900
70 720
Less Closing inventory 6 090
64 630 (1)
Gross profit 80 370 (1)OF
Less Expenses
Rent and insurance (9 280 (1) – (2/3 × 1 800) (1)) 8 080
Wages (24 750 + 2 250) 27 000 (1)
Operating expenses 8 500
Depreciation of Fittings 25 600 (1) 69 180
(20% × (200 000 – 72 000))
Profit from operations 11 190
Debenture interest 1 200 (1)
Profit for the year 9 990 (1)OF
3(b) HV Limited 5
Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended 31 March 2021
Ordinary
General Retained
Details share Total
Reserve earnings
capital
$ $ $ $
2021 2021
Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 5 830 Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 1 050
Alternative calculation
Cost of sales 32 490 (1)
Gross profit 20% 6 498 (1)OF
Sales revenue 38 988 (1)OF
Disadvantages
Income from existing members may fall/members may leave the club (1)
The facilities to members may be reduced (1)
Expenses may be increased (1)
Recommendation (1)
5(a) 9
Entries required to correct the error
Account $ Account $
Cash drawings, $200, had been omitted Drawings 200 Suspense 200
from the drawings account.
A petty cash book payment, $31, to Abel, a Abel 31 (1) Office expenses 31 (1)
supplier, had been recorded in the column
for office expenses.
Sales returns, $105, had been correctly Sales returns 105 (1) Suspense 210 (1)
entered in the customer’s account but had Purchases returns 105 (1)
been credited to the purchases returns
account.
A payment for motor expenses, $72, had Suspense 100 (1) Motor expenses 100 (1)
been recorded in the motor expenses
account as $172.
A purchase invoice, $102, from Abel, had Purchases 204 (1) Abel 204 (1)
been debited to Abel and credited to
purchases.
5(b) Kia 5
Suspense account
5(c) $ 3
Original balance 327
Purchases 204 (1)
Office expenses (31) (1)
Corrected balance 500 (1)OF
ACCOUNTING 0452/23
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper May/June 2021
1 hour 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
DC (NF) 213461
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2
1 Leo maintains a petty cash book using the imprest system. The imprest amount, which is $200, is
restored on the first day of each month.
All payments of less than $100 are made from petty cash. All cash receipts of less than $100 are
paid into petty cash.
On 1 April 2021 Leo had $48 in his petty cash box. Leo provided the following information for April
2021.
April 1 Restored petty cash imprest from the business bank account
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare Leo’s petty cash book for the month of April 2021, on page 3.
Balance the petty cash book and bring down the balance on 1 May 2021.
© UCLES 2021
received paid expenses accounts
$ 2021 $ $ $ $
0452/23/M/J/21
...................... ...................... ............................................................................... ...................... ...................... ...................... ......................
[10]
[Turn over
4
(b) (i) Name the ledger to which each of the following would be posted.
(ii) Name the accounting principle which is being applied when figures from the petty cash
book are posted to the appropriate ledgers.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
REQUIRED
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
Leo is considering making all payments over $50 to trade payables by credit transfer.
REQUIRED
(d) Advise Leo whether he should go ahead with this change. Justify your answer by providing
two advantages and two disadvantages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
2 Tej is a trader who sells goods on credit. His year end is 28 February.
Tej provided the following information.
$
At 1 March 2020
Trade receivables 6250
Other receivables (rent prepaid) 300
At 28 February 2021
Trade receivables 7000
The provision for doubtful debts was 4% of trade receivables at 1 March 2020 and 6% of trade
receivables at 28 February 2021.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the rent payable account for the year ended 28 February 2021. Balance the account
and bring down the balance on 1 March 2021.
Tej
Rent payable account
Date Details $ Date Details $
[6]
(b) Prepare the provision for doubtful debts account for the year ended 28 February 2021.
Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 March 2021.
Tej
Provision for doubtful debts account
Date Details $ Date Details $
[4]
(c) Name the accounting principle applied when the income statement is adjusted for rent
prepaid.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) (i) Explain how the realisation principle is applied to the recording of Tej’s credit sales.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain how the prudence principle is applied to the maintenance of Tej’s provision for
doubtful debts.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
Tej sells to a small number of customers. He has good working relationships with them and they
sometimes recommend him to potential customers.
Tej is concerned that his customers are taking a long time to pay him. He is considering charging
interest on overdue accounts.
REQUIRED
(e) Advise Tej whether or not he should charge interest on overdue accounts. Justify your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
HV Limited
Trial Balance at 31 March 2021
Debit Credit
$ $
Revenue 145 000
Inventory at 1 April 2020 5 820
Purchases 64 900
Rent and insurance 9 280
Wages 24 750
Operating expenses 8 500
Fittings at cost 200 000
Provision for depreciation of fittings 72 000
Trade receivables 12 500
Bank 13 765
Trade payables 6 615
4% Debentures (repayable 1 April 2031) 30 000
Ordinary share capital 70 000
Retained earnings 21 500
Dividend paid on ordinary shares 5 600
345 115 345 115
Additional information
2 Depreciation on fittings is to be charged at 20% per annum using the reducing balance
method.
3 Rent includes a payment of $1800 for the 3 months from 1 March 2021 to 31 May 2021.
5 No debenture interest has been paid for the year ended 31 March 2021.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement for HV Limited for the year ended 31 March 2021.
HV Limited
Income Statement for the year ended 31 March 2021
$ $
[8]
(b) Prepare the statement of changes in equity for HV Limited for the year ended 31 March 2021.
HV Limited
Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended 31 March 2021
Details Ordinary General Retained Total
Share reserve earnings
capital
$ $ $ $
[5]
(c) Calculate the return on capital employed for the year ended 31 March 2021.
The answer should be correct to two decimal places.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) State two differences between ordinary shares and preference shares.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 20]
4 RIA Music Club owns its premises where it has a shop and a number of music rooms.
Shop sales are for cash and shop purchases are on credit. Mark-up is 20%.
The treasurer provided the following information.
At At
1 January 31 December
2020 2020
$ $
Subscriptions in advance 1 200 1 050
Subscriptions in arrears 5 215 5 830
Total shop trade payables 4 275 4 990
Shop inventory 2 500 2 500
Balance at bank 240 110
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 31 December 2020. Balance the
account and bring down the balances on 1 January 2021.
[6]
(b) Prepare the total shop trade payables account for the year ended 31 December 2020 to
calculate the amount paid to shop trade payables.
(c) Calculate the revenue from shop sales for the year ended 31 December 2020.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
The treasurer is concerned about the decreasing bank balance and the increase in shop trade
payables. He is looking into the possibility of renting out part of the club premises to an art society
for $400 per month.
REQUIRED
(d) Advise the treasurer whether renting out part of the premises is the most suitable way of
improving cash flow or whether other methods may be more suitable. Justify your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
5 Kia is a trader.
The totals of the trial balance prepared on 30 April 2021 did not agree and the difference was
placed in a suspense account.
Kia later discovered the errors shown in the table in part (a).
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the following table to show the entries required to correct each error.
The first one has been completed as an example.
Cash drawings, $200, had been omitted Drawings 200 Suspense 200
from the drawings account.
Sales returns, $105, had been correctly ................... ............ ................... ............
entered in the customer’s account but
had been credited to the purchases ................... ............ ................... ............
returns account.
[9]
(b) Prepare the suspense account. Include the original difference on the trial balance, as a
balancing figure.
Kia
Suspense account
Date Details $ Date Details $
[5]
(c) The account for Abel in Kia’s books showed that Kia owed him $327 before the errors were
corrected. Calculate the correct amount which Kia owed Abel at 30 April 2021.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
REQUIRED
(d) State three reasons why Kia did not record this as a non-current asset.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 20]
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/23
Paper 2 May/June 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2021 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.
Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.
Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.
Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).
Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.
a DO credit answers which are worded differently from the mark scheme if they clearly convey the same meaning (unless the mark scheme
requires a specific term)
b DO credit alternative answers/examples which are not written in the mark scheme if they are correct
c DO credit answers where candidates give more than one correct answer in one prompt/numbered/scaffolded space where extended
writing is required rather than list-type answers. For example, questions that require n reasons (e.g. State two reasons …).
d DO NOT credit answers simply for using a ‘key term’ unless that is all that is required. (Check for evidence it is understood and not used
wrongly.)
e DO NOT credit answers which are obviously self-contradicting or trying to cover all possibilities
f DO NOT give further credit for what is effectively repetition of a correct point already credited unless the language itself is being tested.
This applies equally to ‘mirror statements’ (i.e. polluted/not polluted).
g DO NOT require spellings to be correct, unless this is part of the test. However spellings of syllabus terms must allow for clear and
unambiguous separation from other syllabus terms with which they may be confused (e.g. Corrasion/Corrosion)
4 Annotation:
• For point marking, ticks can be used to indicate correct answers and crosses can be used to indicate wrong answers. There is no direct
relationship between ticks and marks. Ticks have no defined meaning for levels of response marking.
• For levels of response marking, the level awarded should be annotated on the script.
• Other annotations will be used by examiners as agreed during standardisation, and the meaning will be understood by all examiners who
marked that paper.
1(a) Leo 10
Petty Cash Book
Total Total Office Ledger
Date Details Travel
received paid expenses accounts
$ 2021 $ $ $ $
13 Hunter (1) 72 72
25 Conrad (1)
120 27 21 72
91
+ (1) dates
+ (1) OF totalling analysis columns
1(d) Advantages 5
Do not need to keep as much cash on the premises (1)
Less risk of theft or fraud (1)
Do not have to have face to face meeting to pay/save time (1)
Or other relevant advantages
Max (2)
Disadvantages
No source document immediately available (1)
Still have to pay amounts below $50 by other methods (1)
May be easier / more suitable to use cheques (1)
May Increase bank charges (1)
Or other relevant disadvantages
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
2(a) Tej 6
Rent payable account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2020 2021
Mar 1 Balance b/d (1) 300 Feb 28 Income Statement (1) 3 900
Jun 30 Bank (1) 1950 Balance c/d 450
Nov 30 Bank (1) 2100
4350 4 350
2021
Mar 1 Balance b/d (1)OF 450
+ (1) dates
2(b) Tej 4
Provision for doubtful debts account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2021 2020
Feb 28 Balance c/d (7 000 × 6%) (1) 420 Mar 1 Balance b/d (6 250 × 4%) (1) 250
2021
Feb 28 Income statement (1)OF 170
420 420
Mar 1 Balance b/d (1)OF 420
Accept ‘Accruals’
2(d)(i) Revenue is regarded as being earned (1) when title to the goods is passed (1) 2
The profit on sales is not recognised until it is earned (1)
Profit is recognised when earned not when payment is received (1)
Profit is earned when the sale is completed/legal title passes (1)
No profit is recognised when goods are ordered (1)
Accept other valid points.
Max (2)
2(e) Advantages 5
Will encourage customers to pay earlier (1)
May increase liquidity/cash flow (1)
May reduce administration time/costs (1)
Or other relevant advantages
Max (2)
Disadvantages
Good relationships with customers will be damaged (1)
May lose customers/sales may reduce (1)
May incur extra costs to attract customers/advertising/marketing (1)
Or other relevant disadvantages
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
3(a) HV Limited 8
Income Statement for the year ended 31 March 2021
$ $
Revenue 145 000
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 5 820
Purchases 64 900
70 720
Less Closing inventory 6 090
64 630 (1)
Gross profit 80 370 (1)OF
Less Expenses
Rent and insurance (9 280 (1) – (2/3 × 1 800) (1)) 8 080
Wages (24 750 + 2 250) 27 000 (1)
Operating expenses 8 500
Depreciation of Fittings 25 600 (1) 69 180
(20% × (200 000 – 72 000))
Profit from operations 11 190
Debenture interest 1 200 (1)
Profit for the year 9 990 (1)OF
3(b) HV Limited 5
Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended 31 March 2021
Ordinary
General Retained
Details share Total
Reserve earnings
capital
$ $ $ $
2021 2021
Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 5 830 Jan 1 Balance b/d (1) 1 050
Alternative calculation
Cost of sales 32 490 (1)
Gross profit 20% 6 498 (1)OF
Sales revenue 38 988 (1)OF
Disadvantages
Income from existing members may fall/members may leave the club (1)
The facilities to members may be reduced (1)
Expenses may be increased (1)
Recommendation (1)
5(a) 9
Entries required to correct the error
Account $ Account $
Cash drawings, $200, had been omitted Drawings 200 Suspense 200
from the drawings account.
A petty cash book payment, $31, to Abel, a Abel 31 (1) Office expenses 31 (1)
supplier, had been recorded in the column
for office expenses.
Sales returns, $105, had been correctly Sales returns 105 (1) Suspense 210 (1)
entered in the customer’s account but had Purchases returns 105 (1)
been credited to the purchases returns
account.
A payment for motor expenses, $72, had Suspense 100 (1) Motor expenses 100 (1)
been recorded in the motor expenses
account as $172.
A purchase invoice, $102, from Abel, had Purchases 204 (1) Abel 204 (1)
been debited to Abel and credited to
purchases.
5(b) Kia 5
Suspense account
5(c) $ 3
Original balance 327
Purchases 204 (1)
Office expenses (31) (1)
Corrected balance 500 (1)OF
ACCOUNTING 0452/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice October/November 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
Write in soft pencil.
Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
Do not use correction fluid.
Do not write on any bar codes.
You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
The total mark for this paper is 35.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
IB20 11_0452_11/FP
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2
fixtures 6000
inventory 3300
trade receivables 3000
trade payables 4500
other receivables 500
other payables 300
loan to Imran 1000
bank overdraft 1400
Paul account
$ $
4 Which business document is used to update the cash book for standing order payments?
A bank statement
B cheque counterfoil
C paying-in slip
D receipt
5 On 1 March 2020 the bank column of a cash book had a credit balance of $290.
During March cheques totalling $580 were received and cheques totalling $610 were paid to
suppliers. Bank charges of $12 incurred in February were also entered in the cash book.
What was the balance of the bank column in the cash book on 1 April 2020?
A $248 credit
B $248 debit
C $332 credit
D $332 debit
6 Ziningi prepared a trial balance. The total of the debit column was $225 750 and the total of the
credit column was $225 250.
7 Rent received from a tenant was debited to the rent receivable account and credited to the cash
book.
A commission
B compensating
C complete reversal
D principle
8 A computer system purchased from Ace Computers for $1430 had been incorrectly recorded as
$1340 and was entered in the stationery account instead of the office equipment account.
debit credit
$ $
A Ace computers 90
stationery 1340
office equipment 1340
B Ace computers 90
stationery 1340
office equipment 1430
9 Kate calculated her draft profit for the year at $28 400.
11 A trader debited the cost of repairing office equipment to the office equipment account.
A overstated overstated
B overstated understated
C understated overstated
D understated understated
What effect will this have over the life of the non-current asset?
After the statement of financial position was prepared it was found that the machinery repairs
costing $2000 had been debited to the machinery account.
What is the correct balance on the provision for the depreciation of machinery account?
14 At the end of his financial year on 31 August 2020 a trader had prepaid insurance.
How will this appear in the insurance account and the statement of financial position at
31 August 2020?
15 Hayley’s financial year ends on 30 September 2020. She provided the following information.
$
on 1 October 2019
rent receivable accrued 480
during the year ended 30 September 2020
rent received 6800
On 30 September 2020
rent received in advance 720
debit credit
$ $
A income statement 5600
rent receivable 5600
B income statement 6560
rent receivable 6560
C rent receivable 5600
income statement 5600
D rent receivable 6560
income statement 6560
16 The balances in the books of Jason on 1 July 2019 included the following.
Trade receivables at 30 June 2020 were $58 500, of which $500 should be written off as
irrecoverable.
Jason wants to maintain his provision for doubtful debts at 2% of trade receivables.
What was the change in the provision for doubtful debts at 30 June 2020?
A $114 decrease
B $124 decrease
C $376 increase
D $386 increase
The following information is available about his inventory at the end of the financial year.
It was found that 100 units of product G were damaged and were unsaleable.
18 Which items will not be shown in an income statement prepared for a service business?
1 cost of sales
2 gross profit
3 profit for the year
4 wages paid to employees
20 John and Mark are in partnership. Profits and losses are shared in the ratio 3 : 2. John is entitled
to an annual salary of $12 000. The profit for the year ended 31 August 2020 was $52 000.
How much would be credited to the partners’ current accounts on 31 August 2020?
John’s Mark’s
current account current account
$ $
A 24 000 16 000
B 26 000 26 000
C 31 200 20 800
D 36 000 16 000
21 A partnership maintains both current and capital accounts for each partner. An inexperienced
book-keeper prepared the following account which contains errors.
5% debentures 50 000
general reserve 25 000
issued ordinary share capital 300 000
retained earnings 75 000
short-term bank loan 10 000
What may appear in the receipts and payments account for the year ended 31 August 2020?
26 A manufacturer’s work in progress at the start of the year was valued at $850. At the end of the
year it was valued at $10 200.
What was the effect of this increase on the cost of production and the cost of sales?
cost of cost of
production sales
A decrease decrease
B decrease increase
C increase decrease
D increase increase
27 A trader made the following forecasts for the business for the next financial year.
What are the forecast sales for the next financial year?
29 A company provided the following information about its rate of inventory turnover.
year 1 24 times
year 2 25 times
year 3 27 times
year 1 2.3 : 1
year 2 2.4 : 1
year 3 2.5 : 1
A Inventory is decreasing.
B Other payables are increasing.
C Other receivables are increasing.
D Trade receivables are decreasing.
32 Zak has depreciated his machinery at the rate of 20% per annum using the straight-line method.
On 31 December 2019 Zak was considering calculating the annual depreciation at 20% per
annum on the net book value of the machinery.
33 The financial statements of a business are prepared on the basis that it will continue to operate
for many years into the future.
A business entity
B going concern
C money measurement
D realisation
34 When Marina opened a business she purchased a stapler for the office.
A consistency
B historic cost
C materiality
D prudence
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/11
Paper 1 October/November 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2020 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some
Cambridge O Level components.
1 D 1
2 B 1
3 A 1
4 A 1
5 C 1
6 A 1
7 C 1
8 D 1
9 D 1
10 A 1
11 A 1
12 B 1
13 B 1
14 A 1
15 C 1
16 B 1
17 A 1
18 B 1
19 C 1
20 D 1
21 B 1
22 B 1
23 D 1
24 A 1
25 B 1
26 A 1
27 D 1
28 D 1
29 C 1
30 C 1
31 D 1
32 C 1
33 B 1
34 C 1
35 B 1
ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice October/November 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
• There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 35.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
IB20 11_0452_12/3RP
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2
A an entry made in the bank column of the cash book for a cheque received
B cost of goods purchased on credit entered in the supplier’s account
C expenses paid during the year entered in the income statement
D goods returned by a customer entered in the sales returns journal
fixtures 6000
inventory 3300
trade receivables 3000
trade payables 4500
other receivables 500
other payables 300
loan to Imran 1000
bank overdraft 1400
account to account to
be debited be credited
Paul account
$ $
8 Sue allows 2% cash discount to credit customers who settle their account within 28 days. Jane
purchased goods, list price $200, on 10 September. She returned these goods on 15 September.
A commission
B original entry
C principle
D reversal
10 Motor vehicle expenses, $50, were incorrectly debited to the motor vehicles account.
debit credit
$ $
11 Kate calculated her draft profit for the year at $28 400.
12 A trader’s bank statement showed a credit balance of $2940. The following items had not been
entered in the cash book.
What was the debit balance in the cash book before it was updated?
15 A trader debited the cost of repairing office equipment to the office equipment account.
A overstated overstated
B overstated understated
C understated overstated
D understated understated
After the statement of financial position was prepared it was found that the machinery repairs
costing $2000 had been debited to the machinery account.
What is the correct balance on the provision for the depreciation of machinery account?
17 A machine which cost $32 000 was sold for $14 000. The total depreciation at the date of disposal
was $15 000.
A $3000 profit
B $3000 loss
C $18 000 profit
D $18 000 loss
18 Beena maintains a provision for doubtful debts of 3% of the trade receivables at the end of each
financial year.
debit credit
$ $
A income statement 384
provision for doubtful debts 384
B income statement 1284
provision for doubtful debts 1284
C provision for doubtful debts 384
income statement 384
D provision for doubtful debts 1284
income statement 1284
The following information is available about his inventory at the end of the financial year.
It was found that 100 units of product G were damaged and were unsaleable.
A hairdressing salon
B accountant’s practice
C supermarket
D computer repair shop
21 The financial year of Peter ends on 30 September. On 1 August 2020 Peter received rent $1000.
This covered the period from 1 July to 30 November 2020.
Which entry will be made in Peter’s statement of financial position on 30 September 2020?
22 In addition to a share of the profit a partner receives interest on capital, a salary and is charged
interest on drawings.
During the year ended 30 June 2020 subscriptions received from members totalled $2500.
This included $120 paid in advance for the next financial year. Subscriptions outstanding on
30 June 2020 amounted to $280.
How much was recorded for subscriptions in the income and expenditure account for the year
ended 30 June 2020?
25 Anthony does not keep a full set of accounting records. He knows his opening and closing cash
balances and wishes to calculate his cash sales.
Which item does Anthony not need in order to calculate his cash sales?
A cash banked
B cash discount
C cash drawings
D cash expenses
How can she calculate the credit sales for the year?
27 A trader made the following forecasts for the business for the next financial year.
What are the forecast sales for the next financial year?
year 1 2.3 : 1
year 2 2.4 : 1
year 3 2.5 : 1
A Inventory is decreasing.
B Other payables are increasing.
C Other receivables are increasing.
D Trade receivables are decreasing.
30 Meesha provided the following information for her first year of trading.
In her second year of trading, Meesha reduced the selling price and sold 1500 units. Her gross
profit decreased by $250. There was no change in the cost per unit.
What was the total value of sales in the second year of trading?
31 AB Limited and CD Limited both started business on 1 January 2019 with an ordinary share
capital of $100 000. Neither company had any debentures or loans.
The return on capital employed (ROCE) was calculated using closing capital employed.
Which statement about AB Limited’s ROCE is correct when compared to that of CD Limited?
32 Which interested party uses the financial statements of a business to assess current performance
and plan for future activities?
A banks
B employees
C government
D managers
33 The special skills of the employees are not recorded in the financial statements of a business.
A historic cost
B materiality
C money measurement
D realisation
assets losses
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/12
Paper 1 October/November 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2020 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some
Cambridge O Level components.
1 D 1
2 C 1
3 B 1
4 B 1
5 C 1
6 A 1
7 B 1
8 D 1
9 A 1
10 A 1
11 D 1
12 A 1
13 B 1
14 A 1
15 A 1
16 B 1
17 B 1
18 A 1
19 A 1
20 C 1
21 C 1
22 C 1
23 D 1
24 C 1
25 B 1
26 D 1
27 D 1
28 C 1
29 D 1
30 C 1
31 A 1
32 D 1
33 C 1
34 B 1
35 B 1
ACCOUNTING 0452/13
Paper 1 Multiple Choice October/November 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
• There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 35.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
IB20 11_0452_13/2RP
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2
fixtures 6000
inventory 3300
trade receivables 3000
trade payables 4500
other receivables 500
other payables 300
loan to Imran 1000
bank overdraft 1400
Paul account
$ $
4 Which business document is used to update the cash book for standing order payments?
A bank statement
B cheque counterfoil
C paying-in slip
D receipt
5 On 1 March 2020 the bank column of a cash book had a credit balance of $290.
During March cheques totalling $580 were received and cheques totalling $610 were paid to
suppliers. Bank charges of $12 incurred in February were also entered in the cash book.
What was the balance of the bank column in the cash book on 1 April 2020?
A $248 credit
B $248 debit
C $332 credit
D $332 debit
6 Ziningi prepared a trial balance. The total of the debit column was $225 750 and the total of the
credit column was $225 250.
7 Rent received from a tenant was debited to the rent receivable account and credited to the cash
book.
A commission
B compensating
C complete reversal
D principle
8 A computer system purchased from Ace Computers for $1430 had been incorrectly recorded as
$1340 and was entered in the stationery account instead of the office equipment account.
debit credit
$ $
A Ace computers 90
stationery 1340
office equipment 1340
B Ace computers 90
stationery 1340
office equipment 1430
9 Kate calculated her draft profit for the year at $28 400.
11 A trader debited the cost of repairing office equipment to the office equipment account.
A overstated overstated
B overstated understated
C understated overstated
D understated understated
What effect will this have over the life of the non-current asset?
After the statement of financial position was prepared it was found that the machinery repairs
costing $2000 had been debited to the machinery account.
What is the correct balance on the provision for the depreciation of machinery account?
14 At the end of his financial year on 31 August 2020 a trader had prepaid insurance.
How will this appear in the insurance account and the statement of financial position at
31 August 2020?
15 Hayley’s financial year ends on 30 September 2020. She provided the following information.
$
on 1 October 2019
rent receivable accrued 480
during the year ended 30 September 2020
rent received 6800
On 30 September 2020
rent received in advance 720
debit credit
$ $
A income statement 5600
rent receivable 5600
B income statement 6560
rent receivable 6560
C rent receivable 5600
income statement 5600
D rent receivable 6560
income statement 6560
16 The balances in the books of Jason on 1 July 2019 included the following.
Trade receivables at 30 June 2020 were $58 500, of which $500 should be written off as
irrecoverable.
Jason wants to maintain his provision for doubtful debts at 2% of trade receivables.
What was the change in the provision for doubtful debts at 30 June 2020?
A $114 decrease
B $124 decrease
C $376 increase
D $386 increase
The following information is available about his inventory at the end of the financial year.
It was found that 100 units of product G were damaged and were unsaleable.
18 Which items will not be shown in an income statement prepared for a service business?
1 cost of sales
2 gross profit
3 profit for the year
4 wages paid to employees
20 John and Mark are in partnership. Profits and losses are shared in the ratio 3 : 2. John is entitled
to an annual salary of $12 000. The profit for the year ended 31 August 2020 was $52 000.
How much would be credited to the partners’ current accounts on 31 August 2020?
John’s Mark’s
current account current account
$ $
A 24 000 16 000
B 26 000 26 000
C 31 200 20 800
D 36 000 16 000
21 A partnership maintains both current and capital accounts for each partner. An inexperienced
book-keeper prepared the following account which contains errors.
5% debentures 50 000
general reserve 25 000
issued ordinary share capital 300 000
retained earnings 75 000
short-term bank loan 10 000
What may appear in the receipts and payments account for the year ended 31 August 2020?
26 A manufacturer’s work in progress at the start of the year was valued at $850. At the end of the
year it was valued at $10 200.
What was the effect of this increase on the cost of production and the cost of sales?
cost of cost of
production sales
A decrease decrease
B decrease increase
C increase decrease
D increase increase
27 A trader made the following forecasts for the business for the next financial year.
What are the forecast sales for the next financial year?
29 A company provided the following information about its rate of inventory turnover.
year 1 24 times
year 2 25 times
year 3 27 times
year 1 2.3 : 1
year 2 2.4 : 1
year 3 2.5 : 1
A Inventory is decreasing.
B Other payables are increasing.
C Other receivables are increasing.
D Trade receivables are decreasing.
32 Zak has depreciated his machinery at the rate of 20% per annum using the straight-line method.
On 31 December 2019 Zak was considering calculating the annual depreciation at 20% per
annum on the net book value of the machinery.
33 The financial statements of a business are prepared on the basis that it will continue to operate
for many years into the future.
A business entity
B going concern
C money measurement
D realisation
34 When Marina opened a business she purchased a stapler for the office.
A consistency
B historic cost
C materiality
D prudence
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/13
Paper 1 October/November 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2020 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some
Cambridge O Level components.
1 D 1
2 B 1
3 A 1
4 A 1
5 C 1
6 A 1
7 C 1
8 D 1
9 D 1
10 A 1
11 A 1
12 B 1
13 B 1
14 A 1
15 C 1
16 B 1
17 A 1
18 B 1
19 C 1
20 D 1
21 B 1
22 B 1
23 D 1
24 A 1
25 B 1
26 A 1
27 D 1
28 D 1
29 C 1
30 C 1
31 D 1
32 C 1
33 B 1
34 C 1
35 B 1
ACCOUNTING 0452/21
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper October/November 2020
1 hour 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
DC (PQ) 207257
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2
1 Sariah owns a business selling ladies’ clothing. She maintains a system of double entry
bookkeeping.
2 Ruhee, a credit customer, was declared bankrupt owing Sariah $1200. The debt is to be
written off.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare journal entries to record the above transactions. Narratives are not required.
Sariah
Journal
Sariah is preparing her financial statements for the year ended 30 September 2020. She provides
the following information for fixtures and fittings.
2019 $
October 1 Fixtures and fittings at cost 28 600
Provision for depreciation of fixtures and fittings 6 185
2020
January 31 Sold fixtures and received a cheque 1 150
The fixtures had been purchased on 1 February 2018 for $1500
March 31 Purchased new fixtures paying by cheque 3 500
Sariah’s policy is to provide depreciation on fixtures and fittings at 10% per annum using the
reducing balance method. A full year’s depreciation is charged in the year of purchase but none in
the year of disposal.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the following accounts for the year ended 30 September 2020. Close the accounts
by balancing or by making an appropriate year end transfer.
Sariah
Fixtures and fittings account
Disposal account
[11]
Sariah is considering forming a partnership with her friend Emy who runs a similar business.
REQUIRED
(c) Advise Sariah whether or not she should form a partnership with Emy. Justify your answer
with two advantages and two disadvantages of forming a partnership with Emy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
2 Eniola compared her bank statement for July 2020 with the bank columns of her cash book. She
provided the following information.
$
Overdrawn balance shown in the cash book at 31 July 2020 3420
Direct debit payment dated 25 July 2020, had not yet been entered in
the cash book 350
A cheque received from a customer on 12 July 2020 was dishonoured.
This dishonoured cheque had not yet been recorded in the cash book 665
Bank charges on the bank statement had not yet been entered in
the cash book 45
Unpresented cheques at 31 July 2020 1290
Uncredited deposits at 31 July 2020 410
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the corrected balance of the bank columns in the cash book at 31 July 2020.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Prepare a bank reconciliation statement at 31 July 2020. Clearly identify the bank statement
balance at that date.
Eniola
Bank Reconciliation Statement at 31 July 2020
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
Eniola is concerned that her bank balance has decreased significantly during the last year. She is
considering how to improve her liquidity.
REQUIRED
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
Eniola’s financial year end is 31 July 2020. She provided the following information about the rent
and rates of her business.
On 1 August 2019, she owed two months’ rent totalling $900. On the same date, rates of $260
were prepaid up to 30 September 2019.
During the year ended 31 July 2020 the following payments were made by credit transfer.
2019 $
August 1 Seven months’ rent 3150
October 1 Twelve months’ rates 1860
2020
March 1 Six months’ rent 2700
REQUIRED
(d) Prepare the rent and rates account for the year ended 31 July 2020. Balance the account and
bring down the balances on 1 August 2020.
Eniola
Rent and rates account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2019 2019
Aug 1 Balance (rates) b/d 260 Aug 1 Balance (rent) b/d 900
(e) Identify the sections of the statement of financial position at 31 July 2020 in which each of the
balances on the rent and rates account would appear.
Rent ..........................................................................................................................................
Rates ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(f) (i) Name one accounting principle Eniola would apply when recording the rent and rates in
her financial statements.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State how Eniola would apply the accounting principle named in (f)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 20]
3 Haziq has not maintained full accounting records for his business.
Haziq provided the following information for the year ended 31 July 2020.
At 1 August At 31 July
2019 2020
$ $
Bank loan 6 000 4 500
Inventory 8 400 ?
Non-current assets at net book value 35 580 32 450
Rent prepaid 240 –
Trade payables 6 280 7 460
Wages accrued – 610
Additional information
2 All sales were for cash and all cash received was banked.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 31 July 2020.
Haziq
Income Statement for the year ended 31 July 2020
$ $
(b) Advise Haziq whether or not he should maintain a double entry bookkeeping system for his
business. Justify your answer with two advantages and two disadvantages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
$
6% debentures (2028) 18 000
Bank overdraft 6 450
Dividend paid 2 000
General reserve at 1 October 2019 6 500
Inventory at 30 September 2020 26 300
Issued share capital at 1 October 2019 200 000
Non-current assets at 30 September 2020
Cost 462 000
Provision for depreciation 106 000
Other payables 2 200
Other receivables 1 600
Provision for doubtful debts at 1 October 2019 625
Retained earnings 73 475
Trade payables 8 250
Trade receivables 14 500
Additional information
A draft income statement for the year ended 30 September 2020 was prepared showing a profit of
$84 900.
1 Inventory of $26 300 included items valued at cost $5200 that needed repair. After repairs
costing $600, the items could be sold for $5000.
2 Operating expenses included insurance of $400 that was prepaid at 30 September 2020.
3 The provision for doubtful debts should have been adjusted so that it equals 5% of trade
receivables.
There was no change to the issued share capital during the year ended 30 September 2020.
REQUIRED
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Calculate the revised profit for the year ended 30 September 2020 after adjusting for
errors 1–3.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) Prepare the statement of changes in equity for the year ended 30 September 2020.
DW Limited
Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended 30 September 2020
Details Share General Retained Total
capital reserve earnings
$ $ $ $
On 1 October 2019 .................. .................. .................. ..................
DW Limited
Statement of Financial Position at 30 September 2020
$ $ $
[9]
[Total: 20]
5 Nazim owns a wholesale business and has prepared draft financial statements for the year ended
30 June 2020, his first year of trading.
After the preparation of these financial statements, some errors were discovered.
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the table to indicate the effect of each error on the profit for the year and on
working capital at 30 June 2020.
[8]
After correcting the errors, Nazim compared his results with those of his brother Aziz, who has a
similar business.
Nazim Aziz
Current ratio 1.71:1 2.12:1
Liquid (acid test) ratio 0.77:1 1.28:1
Return on capital employed 13.65% 15.25%
REQUIRED
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
Nazim discovered that his rate of inventory turnover (times) was also lower than that of Aziz.
REQUIRED
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
Nazim is concerned about the length of time his credit customers are taking to pay their accounts.
He is considering operating a strict credit control policy requiring customers to pay within 30 days.
REQUIRED
(d) Advise Nazim whether or not he should introduce this strict credit control policy. Justify your
answer by providing two advantages and two disadvantages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/21
Paper 2 October/November 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2020 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some
Cambridge O Level components.
These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.
Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.
Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.
Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).
Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.
1(a) Sariah 4
Journal
Details Debit Credit
$ $
1(b) Sariah 11
Fixtures and fittings account
2019 $ 2020 $
Oct 1 Balance b/d 28 600 Jan 31 Disposal 1 500 (1)
2020 Sep 30 Balance c/d 30 600
Mar 31 Bank 3 500 (1)
32 100 32 100
2020
Oct 1 Balance b/d 30 600 (1) OF
Disposal account
2020 $ 2020 $
Jan 31 Fixtures and fittings Jan 31 Prov. for Dep. 285 (1)OF
1 500 (1) Bank 1 150 (1)
Sep 30 Income statement
____ 65 (1)OF
1 500 1 500
+ (1) Dates
1(c) Advantages 5
Emy may introduce additional capital (1)
Emy may bring additional specialist skills to the business (1)
Sariah may benefit from Emy’s contacts from her business (1)
The partners will be able to share the workload/responsibilities/risks (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)
Disadvantages
Sariah will have to share profits with Emy (1)
Decision making may take longer (1)
Disagreements between the partners may occur (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
2(a) $ 4
Balance at 31 July 2020 (3 420)
Direct debit payment (350) (1)
Dishonoured cheque (665) (1)
Bank charges (45) (1)
Revised balance at 31 July 2020 (4 480) (1)OF
2(b) Eniola 4
Bank Reconciliation Statement at 31 July 2020
$
Balance in cash book (4 480) (1)OF
Cheques not yet presented 1 290 (1)
(3 190)
Amounts not yet credited (410) (1)
Balance on bank statement (3 600) (1)OF
Alternative presentation
$
Balance on bank statement (3 600) (1)OF
Amounts not yet credited 410 (1)
(3 190)
Cheques not yet presented (1 290) (1)
Balance in cash book (4 480) (1)OF
2(c)(i) Do not have to pay the purchase price of these assets (1) 1
Will pay a monthly/yearly hire charge which spreads the outlay (1)
Will possibly have to pay more than the actual cost if hire for a long time (1)
Will never own these assets (1)
Possibly will not have any repair costs (1)
There will be no depreciation charge (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max 1
Max 1
2(d) Eniola 6
Rent and rates account
2019 $ 2019 $
Aug 1 Balance (rates) b/d 260 Aug 1 Balance (rent) b/d 900
Bank 3 150 } 2020
Oct 1 Bank 1 860 } Jul 31 Income statement
2020 }(1) Rent 5400 (1)OF
Mar 1 Bank 2 700 } Rates 1810 (1)OF 7 210
Jul 31 Balance c/d 450 Balance c/d 310
8 420 8 420
2020 2020
Aug 1 Balance (rates) b/d 310 (1) Aug 1 Balance (rent) b/d 450 (1)
+ (1) dates
2(f)(ii) Matching – the expense for the year is matched to the revenue for the year (1) 1
OR
Prudence – ensures that the profit for the year is not overstated (1)
3(a) Haziq 15
Income Statement for the year ended 31 July 2020
$ $
Revenue 166 000 (1)
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 8 400
Purchases (96 220 (1) – 6 280 (1) + 7 460 (1)) 97 400
105 800
Less Closing inventory 6 200 (1)OF 99 600 (1)OF
Gross profit 66 400 (1)
Less expenses
Rent (2 640 (1) + 240 (1)) 2 880
Wages (41 400 (1) + 610 (1)) 42 010
General expenses 10 890 (1)
Depreciation of non-current assets
(35 580 – 32 450) 3 130 (1) 58 910
Profit from operations 7 490
Less Loan interest 300 (1)
Profit for the year 7 190 (1)OF
3(b) Advantages 5
Enables easier production of financial statements (1)
Enables greater accuracy of the financial records (1)
Provides checks and balances to minimise possibility of fraud (1)
Facilitates easier decision making/easier for reference/easier comparisons/better understanding of finances (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)
Disadvantages
May be complex and harder to understand for the non-accountant (1)
Time consuming (1)
May be costly to set-up (1)
Not all errors will be identified (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
4(a) $ 2
Inventory at 30 September 2020 26 300
Original cost of damaged goods (5 200) }(1)
Net realisable value of damaged goods 4 400 }
Correct value of inventory 25 500 (1)OF
4(b) $ $ 4
Draft profit for the year 84 900
Add Insurance prepaid omitted 400 (1)
85 300
Less Inventory overstated 800 (1)OF
Provision for doubtful debts omitted 100 (1) 900
Revised profit for the year 84 400 (1)OF
4(c) DW Limited 5
Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended 30 September 2020
Details Share General Retained Total
capital reserve earnings
$ $ $ $
On 1 October 2019 200 000 6 500 73 475 279 975 (1) row
Profit for the year 84 400 84 400 (1) OF row
Dividend paid (2 000) (2 000) (1) row
Transfer to general reserve 5 000 (5 000) (1) row
On 30 September 2020 200 000 11 500 150 875 362 375 (1) OF row
4(d) DW Limited 9
Statement of Financial Position at 30 September 2020
$ $ $
Assets
Cost Accumulated Net book
depreciation value
Non-current assets 462 000 106 000 356 000 (1)
Current assets
Inventory 25 500 (1)OF
Trade receivables 14 500
Less Provision for doubtful debts 725 (1) 13 775 (1)
Other receivables (1 600 + 400) 2 000 (1)
41 275
Total assets 397 275
5(a) 8
Effect on profit Effect on
for the year working capital
Repairs to office equipment had been entered in the office equipment account Overstated No effect
No adjustment had been made for insurance prepaid Understated (1) Understated (1)
An irrecoverable debt had not been written off Overstated (1) Overstated (1)
No record had been made of additional capital introduced in cash No effect (1) Understated (1)
5(b)(i) Aziz has more current assets/more inventory/more trade receivables/more cash (1) 2
Aziz has less current liabilities/trade payables/bank overdraft (1)
Max 2
Max 1
5(d) Advantages 5
Cash received earlier (1)
Reduces possibility of irrecoverable debts (1)
May reduce bank overdraft interest charges (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)
Disadvantages
May lose customers/may reduce sales (1)
Will increase administration costs/may reduce profits (1)
May damage relationship with customers (1)
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper October/November 2020
1 hour 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
DC (RCL/GO) 186554/3
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2
On 1 August 2020, the balance on credit customer Petra’s sales ledger account was $940 debit.
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the table to name each business document and book of prime entry for the following
transactions in Dev’s accounting records.
(b) Prepare the account of Petra for August 2020 as it would appear in Dev’s sales ledger.
Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 September 2020.
Dev
Petra account
Date Date
2020 Details $ 2020 Details $
[6]
(c) Identify the section of Dev’s statement of financial position at 31 August 2020 in which the
balance on Petra’s account would appear.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
Dev allows his credit customers a cash discount of 5% for prompt payment. He is considering
reducing this to 2%.
REQUIRED
(d) State one advantage and one disadvantage to Dev of this proposal.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
REQUIRED
(e) Advise Dev whether or not he should form a limited company. Justify your answer with two
advantages and two disadvantages of forming a limited company.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
2 BH Sports Club provides sporting facilities and a café for the use of its members and guests.
The club’s financial year ends on 31 July. The following information is available.
Receipts and Payments Account for the year ended 31 July 2020
Details $ Details $
Balance b/d 840 Purchases of café supplies 8 190
Subscriptions received 9 960 Wages – café staff 2 750
Café takings 13 520 Wages – sports staff 5 220
Insurance – sports hall and
sports equipment 1 430
Sports equipment 2 100
Sports hall expenses 3 360
Balance c/d 1 270
24 320 24 320
Additional information
Sports equipment is depreciated at 10% per annum using the reducing balance method.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 31 July 2020. Balance the account and
bring down the balances on 1 August 2020.
BH Sports Club
Subscriptions account
(b) Calculate the café profit for the year ended 31 July 2020.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................ [4]
(c) Prepare the income and expenditure account for the year ended 31 July 2020.
BH Sports Club
Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended 31 July 2020
$ $
(d) (i) State what the balance on BH Sports Club’s accumulated fund represents.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the effect that the surplus or deficit on BH Sports Club’s income and expenditure
account for the year ended 31 July 2020 will have on the accumulated fund.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 20]
$
7% debentures (2026) 20 000
Administrative expenses 44 000
Carriage inwards 1 500
Distribution costs 38 000
Debenture interest paid 700
Inventory at 1 October 2019 66 000
Non-current assets at book value at 1 October 2019 610 000
Provision for doubtful debts 1 000
Purchases 263 000
Revenue 529 500
Trade receivables 80 500
Additional information
3 Administrative expenses included rates of $1200 for the six months ending 31 March 2021.
5 Non-current assets should be depreciated by 10% per annum using the reducing balance
method.
7 The directors wish to maintain the provision for doubtful debts at 2% of trade receivables.
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the cost of sales for the year ended 30 September 2020.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Calculate the increase or decrease in the provision for doubtful debts at 30 September 2020.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 30 September 2020.
JP Limited
Income Statement for the year ended 30 September 2020
$ $
(d) Complete the table by placing a tick (✓) in the correct column to indicate the effect on the
equity of JP Limited of each of the following.
[Total: 20]
He provided the following information for the year ended 31 July 2020.
$
Sales 240 000
Cost of sales 169 000
Operating expenses 55 000
Drawings 18 000
Capital employed 62 000
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the profit for the year ended 31 July 2020.
$11 550
[1]
Profit margin
8.56%
Gross margin
34.26%
32.08%
[6]
(c) Comment on the performance of Carlos’s business over the two years (2019 and 2020).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [6]
Carlos is concerned that the business bank balance has shown a large decrease. He is considering
either investing more cash from his private funds or obtaining a two-year bank loan.
REQUIRED
(d) Advise Carlos which option he should select. Justify your answer by providing one advantage
and one disadvantage of each option.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(e) State the name of one party, other than himself and his employees, who would be interested
in Carlos’s financial statements. State one reason for their interest.
[2]
[Total: 20]
The totals of the trial balance on 30 September 2020 did not agree. The totals were debit $10 450
and credit $10 250. A suspense account was opened.
1 The total of the sales returns journal had been overcast by $300.
2 Cash sales, $820, had not been recorded in the books of account.
3 A purchase invoice, $190, had been credited to the account of P Hill instead of D Hill.
4 A cheque payment, $240, for motor repairs had been correctly entered in the cash book but
had been posted to the debit of motor repairs account as $420.
5 Rent received, $310, had been debited to the rent payable account.
7 A cheque paid, $900, to Kamil, a credit supplier, had been entered correctly in the cash book
but had not been posted to Kamil’s account.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the suspense account. Start with the balance arising from the difference on the trial
balance. The account should be balanced or totalled as necessary.
Razia
Suspense account
(c) Complete the table by placing a tick (✓) in the correct column to indicate the effect on the
profit for the year of correcting each error.
7
[7]
REQUIRED
(d) Advise Razia whether or not she should sell on cash terms only. Justify your answer with two
advantages and two disadvantages of selling on cash terms only.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/22
Paper 2 October/November 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2020 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some
Cambridge O Level components.
These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.
Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.
Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.
Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).
Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.
1(a) 6
Transaction Business document Book of prime entry
1(b) Dev 6
Petra account
2020 $ 2020 $
Aug 1 Balance b/d 940 Aug 14 Sales returns 120 (1)
9 Sales 675 (1) 29 Bank 893 (1)
Discount allowed 47 (1)
31 Balance c/d 555
1 615 1 615
2020
Sept 1 Balance b/d 555 (1)OF
+ (1) dates
1(d) Advantage 2
Increase profit for the year (1)
Increase cash inflow (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (1)
Disadvantage
May lose customers/sales may fall (1)
Customers may take longer to pay (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (1)
1(e) Advantages 5
Dev will have limited liability for the debts of the company (1)
The limited company will have a separate legal identity to Dev (1)
Dev will have access to different forms of finance/increase in capital employed (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)
Disadvantages
The limited company will have greater regulation than Dev as a sole trader (1)
The accounting requirements of the limited company will be more complex than for Dev as a sole trader (1)
The financial statements of the limited company may be viewed by the public unlike those of Dev as a sole trader (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
2(b) $ $ 4
Revenue 13 520
Opening inventory 520
Purchases 8 190
8 710
Less Closing inventory 770
7 940 (1)
Wages – café staff (2750 + 80(1) – 60(1)) 2 770 10 710
Profit for the year 2 810 (1)(OF)
2(d)(i) The difference between the assets and the liabilities (1) 1
The accumulated surpluses earned since the club started (1)
Max (1)
3(a) $ 2
Opening inventory 66 000
Purchases 263 000
Carriage inwards 1 500
330 500 (1)
Less Closing inventory 59 000
Cost of sales 271 500 (1) OF
3(b) $ 2
Provision at 30 September 2020 ((80 500 – 500) x 2%) 1 600 (1)
Less Provision at 1 October 2019 1 000
Increase in provision for doubtful debts 600 (1) OF
3(c) JP Limited 12
Income Statement for the year ended 30 September 2020
$ $
Revenue 529 500
Less Cost of sales 271 500 (1) OF
Gross profit 258 000 (1) OF
Less expenses
Administrative expenses (44 000(1) - 1200(1)) 42 800
Distribution costs (38 000(1) + 800(1)) 38 800
Irrecoverable debts 500 (1)
Provision for doubtful debts 600 (1) OF
Depreciation – non-current assets 61 000 (1) 143 700
Profit from operations 114 300
Debenture interest (700(1) + 700 (1)) 1 400
Profit for the year 112 900 (1) OF
3(d) 4
Increase Decrease No effect
4(a) 1
Workings Profit for the year
Gross margin
Workings Answer
Workings Answer
Gross margin
General comment
Has worsened from 34.26% to 29.58% (1)
Possible causes
Reduction in selling price (1)
Purchasing from more expensive suppliers / increased cost of sales (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (1) from possible causes
All comments to be based on Own Figures from (b)
Advantages
Does not have to be repaid (1)
No interest cost (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (1)
Disadvantages
May not have enough available funds (1)
Greater personal risk (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (1)
Loan
Advantages
Instantly available (1)
Has two years to pay it off (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (1)
Disadvantages
Annual interest is charged (1)
Must be repaid (1)
Security may be required (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (1)
Recommendation (1)
4(e) 2
Interested party The interest they would have
Lenders/potential lenders To assess the likelihood of a loan being repaid when due
To assess the ability to pay interest on a loan
To assess the availability of security for a loan
Government/tax authorities To assess the tax due from the owner of the business
5(a) Razia 6
Suspense account
2020 $ 2020 $
Sep 30 Sales returns 300 (1) Sep 30 Difference on trial balance 200 (1)
Motor repairs 180 (1)
Rent receivable 310 (1) Kamil 900 (1)
Rent payable 310 (1) ___
1 100 1 100
5(b) 2
Error Type of error
5(c) 7
Error number Increase profit Decrease profit No effect on profit
1 (1)
2 (1)
3 (1)
4 (1)
5 (1)
6 (1)
7 (1)
5(d) Advantages 5
Less book-keeping (1)
No irrecoverable debts (1)
Cash received immediately (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)
Disadvantages
May lose customers/sales may reduce (1)
May adversely affect customer relationships/customer loyalty (1)
Increased security issues (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
ACCOUNTING 0452/23
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper October/November 2020
1 hour 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
DC (RCL/GO) 186688/3
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
2
1 Sariah owns a business selling ladies’ clothing. She maintains a system of double entry
bookkeeping.
2 Ruhee, a credit customer, was declared bankrupt owing Sariah $1200. The debt is to be
written off.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare journal entries to record the above transactions. Narratives are not required.
Sariah
Journal
Sariah is preparing her financial statements for the year ended 30 September 2020. She provides
the following information for fixtures and fittings.
2019 $
October 1 Fixtures and fittings at cost 28 600
Provision for depreciation of fixtures and fittings 6 185
2020
January 31 Sold fixtures and received a cheque 1 150
The fixtures had been purchased on 1 February 2018 for $1500
March 31 Purchased new fixtures paying by cheque 3 500
Sariah’s policy is to provide depreciation on fixtures and fittings at 10% per annum using the
reducing balance method. A full year’s depreciation is charged in the year of purchase but none in
the year of disposal.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the following accounts for the year ended 30 September 2020. Close the accounts
by balancing or by making an appropriate year end transfer.
Sariah
Fixtures and fittings account
Disposal account
[11]
Sariah is considering forming a partnership with her friend Emy who runs a similar business.
REQUIRED
(c) Advise Sariah whether or not she should form a partnership with Emy. Justify your answer
with two advantages and two disadvantages of forming a partnership with Emy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
2 Eniola compared her bank statement for July 2020 with the bank columns of her cash book. She
provided the following information.
$
Overdrawn balance shown in the cash book at 31 July 2020 3420
Direct debit payment dated 25 July 2020, had not yet been entered in
the cash book 350
A cheque received from a customer on 12 July 2020 was dishonoured.
This dishonoured cheque had not yet been recorded in the cash book 665
Bank charges on the bank statement had not yet been entered in
the cash book 45
Unpresented cheques at 31 July 2020 1290
Uncredited deposits at 31 July 2020 410
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the corrected balance of the bank columns in the cash book at 31 July 2020.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Prepare a bank reconciliation statement at 31 July 2020. Clearly identify the bank statement
balance at that date.
Eniola
Bank Reconciliation Statement at 31 July 2020
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
Eniola is concerned that her bank balance has decreased significantly during the last year. She is
considering how to improve her liquidity.
REQUIRED
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
Eniola’s financial year end is 31 July 2020. She provided the following information about the rent
and rates of her business.
On 1 August 2019, she owed two months’ rent totalling $900. On the same date, rates of $260
were prepaid up to 30 September 2019.
During the year ended 31 July 2020 the following payments were made by credit transfer.
2019 $
August 1 Seven months’ rent 3150
October 1 Twelve months’ rates 1860
2020
March 1 Six months’ rent 2700
REQUIRED
(d) Prepare the rent and rates account for the year ended 31 July 2020. Balance the account and
bring down the balances on 1 August 2020.
Eniola
Rent and rates account
Date Details $ Date Details $
2019 2019
Aug 1 Balance (rates) b/d 260 Aug 1 Balance (rent) b/d 900
(e) Identify the sections of the statement of financial position at 31 July 2020 in which each of the
balances on the rent and rates account would appear.
Rent ..........................................................................................................................................
Rates ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(f) (i) Name one accounting principle Eniola would apply when recording the rent and rates in
her financial statements.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State how Eniola would apply the accounting principle named in (f)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 20]
3 Haziq has not maintained full accounting records for his business.
Haziq provided the following information for the year ended 31 July 2020.
At 1 August At 31 July
2019 2020
$ $
Bank loan 6 000 4 500
Inventory 8 400 ?
Non-current assets at net book value 35 580 32 450
Rent prepaid 240 –
Trade payables 6 280 7 460
Wages accrued – 610
Additional information
2 All sales were for cash and all cash received was banked.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 31 July 2020.
Haziq
Income Statement for the year ended 31 July 2020
$ $
(b) Advise Haziq whether or not he should maintain a double entry bookkeeping system for his
business. Justify your answer with two advantages and two disadvantages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
$
6% debentures (2028) 18 000
Bank overdraft 6 450
Dividend paid 2 000
General reserve at 1 October 2019 6 500
Inventory at 30 September 2020 26 300
Issued share capital at 1 October 2019 200 000
Non-current assets at 30 September 2020
Cost 462 000
Provision for depreciation 106 000
Other payables 2 200
Other receivables 1 600
Provision for doubtful debts at 1 October 2019 625
Retained earnings 73 475
Trade payables 8 250
Trade receivables 14 500
Additional information
A draft income statement for the year ended 30 September 2020 was prepared showing a profit of
$84 900.
1 Inventory of $26 300 included items valued at cost $5200 that needed repair. After repairs
costing $600, the items could be sold for $5000.
2 Operating expenses included insurance of $400 that was prepaid at 30 September 2020.
3 The provision for doubtful debts should have been adjusted so that it equals 5% of trade
receivables.
There was no change to the issued share capital during the year ended 30 September 2020.
REQUIRED
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Calculate the revised profit for the year ended 30 September 2020 after adjusting for
errors 1–3.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) Prepare the statement of changes in equity for the year ended 30 September 2020.
DW Limited
Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended 30 September 2020
Details Share General Retained Total
capital reserve earnings
$ $ $ $
On 1 October 2019 .................. .................. .................. ..................
DW Limited
Statement of Financial Position at 30 September 2020
$ $ $
[9]
[Total: 20]
5 Nazim owns a wholesale business and has prepared draft financial statements for the year ended
30 June 2020, his first year of trading.
After the preparation of these financial statements, some errors were discovered.
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the table to indicate the effect of each error on the profit for the year and on
working capital at 30 June 2020.
[8]
After correcting the errors, Nazim compared his results with those of his brother Aziz, who has a
similar business.
Nazim Aziz
Current ratio 1.71:1 2.12:1
Liquid (acid test) ratio 0.77:1 1.28:1
Return on capital employed 13.65% 15.25%
REQUIRED
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
Nazim discovered that his rate of inventory turnover (times) was also lower than that of Aziz.
REQUIRED
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
Nazim is concerned about the length of time his credit customers are taking to pay their accounts.
He is considering operating a strict credit control policy requiring customers to pay within 30 days.
REQUIRED
(d) Advise Nazim whether or not he should introduce this strict credit control policy. Justify your
answer by providing two advantages and two disadvantages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/23
Paper 2 October/November 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2020 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some
Cambridge O Level components.
These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.
Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.
Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.
Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).
Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.
1(a) Sariah 4
Journal
Details Debit Credit
$ $
1(b) Sariah 11
Fixtures and fittings account
2019 $ 2020 $
Oct 1 Balance b/d 28 600 Jan 31 Disposal 1 500 (1)
2020 Sep 30 Balance c/d 30 600
Mar 31 Bank 3 500 (1)
32 100 32 100
2020
Oct 1 Balance b/d 30 600 (1) OF
Disposal account
2020 $ 2020 $
Jan 31 Fixtures and fittings Jan 31 Prov. for Dep. 285 (1)OF
1 500 (1) Bank 1 150 (1)
Sep 30 Income statement
____ 65 (1)OF
1 500 1 500
+ (1) Dates
1(c) Advantages 5
Emy may introduce additional capital (1)
Emy may bring additional specialist skills to the business (1)
Sariah may benefit from Emy’s contacts from her business (1)
The partners will be able to share the workload/responsibilities/risks (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)
Disadvantages
Sariah will have to share profits with Emy (1)
Decision making may take longer (1)
Disagreements between the partners may occur (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
2(a) $ 4
Balance at 31 July 2020 (3 420)
Direct debit payment (350) (1)
Dishonoured cheque (665) (1)
Bank charges (45) (1)
Revised balance at 31 July 2020 (4 480) (1)OF
2(b) Eniola 4
Bank Reconciliation Statement at 31 July 2020
$
Balance in cash book (4 480) (1)OF
Cheques not yet presented 1 290 (1)
(3 190)
Amounts not yet credited (410) (1)
Balance on bank statement (3 600) (1)OF
Alternative presentation
$
Balance on bank statement (3 600) (1)OF
Amounts not yet credited 410 (1)
(3 190)
Cheques not yet presented (1 290) (1)
Balance in cash book (4 480) (1)OF
2(c)(i) Do not have to pay the purchase price of these assets (1) 1
Will pay a monthly/yearly hire charge which spreads the outlay (1)
Will possibly have to pay more than the actual cost if hire for a long time (1)
Will never own these assets (1)
Possibly will not have any repair costs (1)
There will be no depreciation charge (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max 1
Max 1
2(d) Eniola 6
Rent and rates account
2019 $ 2019 $
Aug 1 Balance (rates) b/d 260 Aug 1 Balance (rent) b/d 900
Bank 3 150 } 2020
Oct 1 Bank 1 860 } Jul 31 Income statement
2020 }(1) Rent 5400 (1)OF
Mar 1 Bank 2 700 } Rates 1810 (1)OF 7 210
Jul 31 Balance c/d 450 Balance c/d 310
8 420 8 420
2020 2020
Aug 1 Balance (rates) b/d 310 (1) Aug 1 Balance (rent) b/d 450 (1)
+ (1) dates
2(f)(ii) Matching – the expense for the year is matched to the revenue for the year (1) 1
OR
Prudence – ensures that the profit for the year is not overstated (1)
3(a) Haziq 15
Income Statement for the year ended 31 July 2020
$ $
Revenue 166 000 (1)
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 8 400
Purchases (96 220 (1) – 6 280 (1) + 7 460 (1)) 97 400
105 800
Less Closing inventory 6 200 (1)OF 99 600 (1)OF
Gross profit 66 400 (1)
Less expenses
Rent (2 640 (1) + 240 (1)) 2 880
Wages (41 400 (1) + 610 (1)) 42 010
General expenses 10 890 (1)
Depreciation of non-current assets
(35 580 – 32 450) 3 130 (1) 58 910
Profit from operations 7 490
Less Loan interest 300 (1)
Profit for the year 7 190 (1)OF
3(b) Advantages 5
Enables easier production of financial statements (1)
Enables greater accuracy of the financial records (1)
Provides checks and balances to minimise possibility of fraud (1)
Facilitates easier decision making/easier for reference/easier comparisons/better understanding of finances (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)
Disadvantages
May be complex and harder to understand for the non-accountant (1)
Time consuming (1)
May be costly to set-up (1)
Not all errors will be identified (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
4(a) $ 2
Inventory at 30 September 2020 26 300
Original cost of damaged goods (5 200) }(1)
Net realisable value of damaged goods 4 400 }
Revised value of inventory 25 500 (1)OF
4(b) $ $ 4
Draft profit for the year 84 900
Add Insurance prepaid omitted 400 (1)
85 300
Less Inventory overstated 800 (1)OF
Provision for doubtful debts omitted 100 (1) 900
Revised profit for the year 84 400 (1)OF
4(c) DW Limited 5
Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended 30 September 2020
Details Share General Retained Total
capital reserve earnings
$ $ $ $
On 1 October 2019 200 000 6 500 73 475 279 975 (1) row
Profit for the year 84 400 84 400 (1) OF row
Dividend paid (2 000) (2 000) (1) row
Transfer to general reserve 5 000 (5 000) (1) row
On 30 September 2020 200 000 11 500 150 875 362 375 (1) OF row
4(d) DW Limited 9
Statement of Financial Position at 30 September 2020
$ $ $
Assets
Cost Accumulated Net book
depreciation value
Non-current assets 462 000 106 000 356 000 (1)
Current assets
Inventory 25 500 (1)OF
Trade receivables 14 500
Less Provision for doubtful debts 725 (1) 13 775 (1)
Other receivables (1 600 + 400) 2 000 (1)
41 275
Total assets 397 275
5(a) 8
Effect on profit Effect on
for the year working capital
Repairs to office equipment had been entered in the office equipment account Overstated No effect
No adjustment had been made for insurance prepaid Understated (1) Understated (1)
An irrecoverable debt had not been written off Overstated (1) Overstated (1)
No record had been made of additional capital introduced in cash No effect (1) Understated (1)
5(b)(i) Aziz has more current assets/more inventory/more trade receivables/more cash (1) 2
Aziz has less current liabilities/trade payables/bank overdraft (1)
Max 1
5(d) Advantages 5
Cash received earlier (1)
Reduces possibility of irrecoverable debts (1)
May reduce bank overdraft interest charges (1)
Accept other valid responses
Max (2)
Disadvantages
May lose customers/may reduce sales (1)
Will increase administration costs/may reduce profits (1)
May damage relationship with customers (1)
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
ACCOUNTING 0452/13
Paper 1 Multiple Choice October/November 2021
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
There are thirty-five questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
Write in soft pencil.
Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
Do not use correction fluid.
Do not write on any bar codes.
You may use a calculator.
INFORMATION
The total mark for this paper is 35.
Each correct answer will score one mark.
Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
IB21 11_0452_13/3RP
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2
2 Hassan is a trader. During the financial year he took goods from the business for his own use.
debit credit
A drawings inventory
B drawings purchases
C income statement inventory
D income statement purchases
A purchases journal
B purchases ledger
C sales journal
D sales ledger
4 Which document does a trader issue to remind a credit customer that payment is due?
A credit note
B debit note
C receipt
D statement of account
6 Farouk sells goods on credit. A cheque from Khalid, a credit customer, was dishonoured by the
bank.
A bank Khalid
B irrecoverable debts Khalid
C Khalid bank
D Khalid irrecoverable debts
A credit customer purchased 20 units and paid the debt within 15 days.
account to account to
be debited be credited
A bank purchases
B purchases bank
C purchases trade payable
D trade payable purchases
10 At the end of each year, PT Limited transfers 20% of the profit for the year to the general reserve.
Draft financial statements were prepared for the year ended 30 September 2021. It was then
discovered that the inventory at 30 September 2021 had been overstated by $1500.
Which effects did the correction of this error have on retained earnings and general reserve at
30 September 2021?
11 The bank columns in a trader’s cash book and the bank statement both showed positive
balances. A comparison revealed the following differences.
What was the difference between the balance shown in the bank column of the cash book and
that shown on the bank statement?
A The cash book balance was $190 higher than the bank statement balance.
B The cash book balance was $190 lower than the bank statement balance.
C The cash book balance was $210 higher than the bank statement balance.
D The cash book balance was $210 lower than the bank statement balance.
13 Two companies each purchased a motor vehicle for $10 000 at the beginning of year 1. Company
G used the straight-line method of depreciation at a rate of 15% per annum, while Company H
used the reducing balance method at a rate of 20% per annum.
What was the difference in the depreciation charge between the two companies for year 2?
14 Amit’s financial year ends on 31 December. The following account appeared in his sales ledger.
Dipak account
2020 $ 2020 $
A an irrecoverable debt
B discount allowed
C the balance carried down
D the recovery of a debt previously written off
15 Sally wished to increase the balance on the provision for doubtful debts account at the end of the
financial year.
debit credit
16 The following errors were found after a statement of financial position had been prepared.
1 A loan repayable in two year’s time had been included as a current liability.
2 A provision for doubtful debts should have been created.
19 Anwar is a sole trader making annual profits of $24 000. He decides to admit Dilip as a partner.
They agree that Anwar would receive a salary, and profits and losses would be shared equally.
The forecast appropriation account for the partnership’s first year of trading is:
20 Kasi and Ravi are in partnership. The financial statements for the year ended 31 August 2021
showed that Ravi was entitled to interest on capital and interest on loan and was charged interest
on drawings.
A
B
C
D
Retained earnings were $86 000 on 1 September 2020 and $88 500 on 31 August 2021.
The company made a profit during the year of $26 000 and made a transfer to general reserve of
$5000.
What was the total ordinary share dividend paid during the year?
23 A sports club was formed on 1 August 2020. During the year ended 31 July 2021 the club
purchased equipment costing $5000, paying by cheque.
A
B
C
D
A raw material
B royalties
C wages of factory supervisors
D wages of production workers
25 The value of Thato’s work in progress increased during the year. This was recorded in his
financial statements.
How did this affect the cost of production and the cost of sales?
cost of
cost of sales
production
A decreased decreased
B decreased no effect
C increased increased
D increased no effect
1 January 31 December
net assets $28 000 $24 000
A $1000 loss
B $1000 profit
C $7000 loss
D $7000 profit
28 Roshan’s sales for his first year of trading were $55 000. His gross profit margin was 20%. The
closing inventory was $3200.
29 Which information is required to calculate the return on capital employed for a sole trader?
A current ratio
B liquid (acid test) ratio
C return on capital employed
D working capital
31 A trader provided the following information for the year ended 31 May 2021.
What was the trade payables turnover (days) for the year ended 31 May 2021?
Year 1 40%
Year 2 38%
Year 3 35%
35 What does the objective of understandability assume users of financial statements will possess?
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/13
Paper 1 October/November 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 35
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2021 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.
1 D 1
2 B 1
3 B 1
4 D 1
5 C 1
6 C 1
7 B 1
8 B 1
9 C 1
10 B 1
11 C 1
12 D 1
13 B 1
14 A 1
15 A 1
16 A 1
17 D 1
18 A 1
19 B 1
20 C 1
21 D 1
22 A 1
23 B 1
24 C 1
25 A 1
26 D 1
27 A 1
28 D 1
29 C 1
30 B 1
31 C 1
32 D 1
33 C 1
34 A 1
35 A 1
ACCOUNTING 0452/21
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper October/November 2021
1 hour 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
DC (RW) 222134
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2
1 Shiv is a trader. His financial year ends on 31 August. He does not maintain a full set of accounting
records but was able to provide the following information for the year ended 31 August 2021.
$ $
Balance b/d 49 000 Expenses 34 000
Cash sales 3 700 Drawings 4 200
Receipts from trade receivables 312 400 Payments to trade payables 257 700
Equipment 16 000
Balance c/d 53 200
365 100 365 100
Shiv had withdrawn $900 for a family holiday during the year. He had included this in the expenses.
On 31 August 2021 Shiv decided to create a provision for doubtful debts of 3% of trade receivables.
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the purchases for the year ended 31 August 2021.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 31 August 2021. The inventory on
31 August 2021 should be clearly shown within the statement.
Shiv
Income Statement for the year ended 31 August 2021
$ $
(c) Name the accounting principle Shiv should apply when recording the $900 he had used for a
family holiday.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
Shiv has always valued his inventory at cost price. He is considering valuing the inventory on
31 August 2021 at selling price as he believes it would result in a higher profit for the year.
REQUIRED
(d) Discuss the implications of Shiv valuing the inventory on 31 August 2021 at selling price.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
2 Jas owns a printing business and has recently incurred various expenditures relating to her
premises.
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the table by inserting a tick (3) to show how each item of expenditure should be
classified. The first one has been completed as an example.
Capital Revenue
expenditure expenditure
[4]
Jas’s business is expanding rapidly and she needs more warehousing space.
Jas can rent an additional warehouse. The rent for the first six months would be $40 000.
Alternatively, Jas can purchase a warehouse for $900 000. She can obtain a long-term loan of
$700 000.
REQUIRED
(b) Advise Jas whether she should rent or purchase a warehouse. Justify your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
An extract from Jas’s statement of financial position at 31 December 2019 showed the following:
During the year ended 31 December 2020 the following transactions took place.
On 30 June 2020 fixtures were sold for $6000, which was received by cheque. These fixtures had
originally been purchased on 1 January 2018 for $20 000.
Jas depreciates fixtures on a straight-line basis. She assumes fixtures will have a useful life of four
years, at which time the residual value will be 10% of original cost. Depreciation is charged for
each part of the year for which the fixtures are owned.
REQUIRED
(c) Prepare the following accounts for the year ended 31 December 2020. Balance each account
and bring down the balance on 1 January 2021.
Jas
Fixtures account
[8]
(d) Prepare the fixtures disposal account for the year ended 31 December 2020.
Jas
Fixtures disposal account
[3]
Workings:
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2021 0452/21/O/N/21 [Turn over
10
3 Anil is a trader. The totals of the trial balance he prepared on 31 December 2020 did not agree.
The debits exceeded the credits by $5140.
2 Sales returns of $520 had been posted as a credit to the purchases account. The correct
entry had been made in the customer’s account.
3 Bank charges of $320 had been correctly entered in the cash book, but had not been entered
in the bank charges account.
4 A cheque refund of $600 for insurance overpaid had been entered on the wrong side of the
bank account and no entry had been made in the insurance account.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare journal entries to correct errors 1 to 4. Narratives are not required.
Anil
Journal
[12]
Anil
Suspense account
[6]
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 20]
4 Karishma runs her own business. The balances in her books on 1 October 2020 included the
following.
$
Insurance account 1700 prepaid
Electricity account 1800 owing
During the financial year ended 30 September 2021 Karishma made the following payments by
cheque.
Insurance payments
$
7 February 2021 3400
13 August 2021 3500
Electricity payments
$
14 October 2020 1800
24 January 2021 1800
26 May 2021 1800
A refund of $300 for insurance overpaid was received by bank transfer on 28 February 2021. The
insurance paid on 13 August 2021 covered a period of five months to 31 December 2021.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the following accounts for the year ended 30 September 2021. Balance the accounts
and bring down the balances on 1 October 2021.
Karishma
Insurance account
Electricity account
[10]
Karishma is considering changing her electricity supplier. The new supplier has offered Karishma
a two-year contract at a fixed monthly amount of $450 payable by direct debit.
REQUIRED
(b) Advise Karishma whether she should change to the new electricity supplier. Justify your
answer with two advantages and two disadvantages of changing supplier.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
On 1 October 2020 Karishma decided to rent out part of her premises to Noor at an annual rent of
$1965.
During the financial year ended 30 September 2021 Noor made the following payments to
Karishma by cheque.
$
1 October 2020 800
2 March 2021 825
8 August 2021 850
The amount received on 8 August 2021 included rent of $510 covering the period 1 October 2021
to 31 December 2021.
REQUIRED
(c) Prepare the rent receivable account for the year ended 30 September 2021. Balance the
account and bring down the balance on 1 October 2021.
Karishma
Rent receivable account
[4]
(d) Identify the section of the statement of financial position at 30 September 2021 in which the
balance on the rent receivable account would appear.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 20]
5 The financial year of VL Sports Club ends on 31 December. The treasurer provided the following
information about receipts and payments for the year ended 31 December 2020.
Receipts $
Subscriptions 19 200
Competition receipts 7 300
Dinner dance ticket sales 6 500
Payments $
Competition prizes 4 100
Dinner dance costs 6 200
Equipment 12 000
General expenses 11 500
Of the subscriptions in arrears on 1 January 2020 an amount of $80 had not been paid by
31 December 2020 and is to be written off as irrecoverable.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 31 December 2020. Balance the
account and bring down the balances on 1 January 2021.
VL Sports Club
Subscriptions account
[8]
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the income and expenditure account for VL Sports Club for the year ended
31 December 2020.
VL Sports Club
Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended 31 December 2020
$ $
The treasurer of VL Sports Club wants to encourage more members to pay their subscriptions in
advance by offering a 10% reduction in annual subscription fees.
(c) Advise the treasurer whether or not VL Sports Club should offer this reduction in annual
subscription fees to members who pay in advance. Justify your answer with one advantage
and one disadvantage.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 20]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/21
Paper 2 October/November 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2021 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.
These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.
Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond
the scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.
Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.
Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range
may be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).
Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.
a DO credit answers which are worded differently from the mark scheme if they clearly convey the same meaning (unless the mark
scheme requires a specific term)
b DO credit alternative answers/examples which are not written in the mark scheme if they are correct
c DO credit answers where candidates give more than one correct answer in one prompt/numbered/scaffolded space where extended
writing is required rather than list-type answers. For example, questions that require n reasons (e.g. State two reasons …).
d DO NOT credit answers simply for using a ‘key term’ unless that is all that is required. (Check for evidence it is understood and not used
wrongly.)
e DO NOT credit answers which are obviously self-contradicting or trying to cover all possibilities
f DO NOT give further credit for what is effectively repetition of a correct point already credited unless the language itself is being tested.
This applies equally to ‘mirror statements’ (i.e. polluted/not polluted).
g DO NOT require spellings to be correct, unless this is part of the test. However spellings of syllabus terms must allow for clear and
unambiguous separation from other syllabus terms with which they may be confused (e.g. Corrasion/Corrosion)
4 Annotation:
• For point marking, ticks can be used to indicate correct answers and crosses can be used to indicate wrong answers. There is no direct
relationship between ticks and marks. Ticks have no defined meaning for levels of response marking.
• For levels of response marking, the level awarded should be annotated on the script.
• Other annotations will be used by examiners as agreed during standardisation, and the meaning will be understood by all examiners
who marked that paper.
1(a) $ 3
Payments to trade payables 257 700
Less Opening trade payables 32 600 (1)
225 100
Add Closing trade payables 29 600 (1)
Purchases 254 700 (1)
1(b) Shiv 11
Income Statement for the year ended 31 August 2021
$ $
Revenue 320 000 (1)
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 23 500
Purchases 254 700 (1) OF
278 200
Closing inventory 22 200 (2) CF/(1) OF
256 000 (1) OF
Gross profit 64 000 (1)
Expenses (34 000 + 400 (1) – 900 (1)) 33 500
Provision for doubtful debts 777 (1)
Depreciation of equipment
(16 000 – 12 800) 3 200 (1)
37 477
Profit for the year 26 523 (1) OF
1(d) Inventory should be valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value (1) 5
Cost of sales would be understated (1)
The profit will be overstated/profit will not be shown at a realistic level (1)
The current assets/inventory will be overstated (1)
Prudence principle is not being observed (1)
Consistency principle is not being observed (1)
Comparison with previous years/competitors would not be accurate (1)
Accounting records must present a realistic view of the business (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (5)
2(a) 4
Capital Revenue
expenditure expenditure
2(b) 5
Rent warehouse Purchase warehouse
The non-current asset is not owned OR Will own an additional non-current (1)
asset/gets fixed asset/owns a
warehouse
Recommendation (1)
2(c) Jas 8
Fixtures account
2(d) Jas 3
Fixtures disposal account
3(a) Anil 12
Journal
1 Suspense 7100
Sales 7100 (1)
(1)
4 Bank 1200
Suspense 600 (2)
Insurance 600 (1)
OR (1)
Bank 1200
Suspense 1200 (1)
Suspense 600 (1)
Insurance 600 (1)
(1)
3(b) Anil 6
Suspense account
+(1) for matching totals OR for an own figure balance brought down
Any 2 × 1 mark
4(a) Karishma 10
Insurance account
Electricity account
Dates (1)
4(b) Advantages 5
Fixed monthly payment (1)
Payments would be made automatically (1)
More difficult to fall behind with payments (1)
Cheaper than existing contract (1)
Helps with planning expenditure (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Disadvantages
Would lose control of her payment schedule/ would not be able to pick and choose when to make the payments (1)
Bank charges might increase (1)
Tied to two-year contract (1)
Need to consider reliability of new supplier (1)
Possible price increase after two years (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
4(c) Karishma 4
Rent receivable account
Dates (1)
Dates (1)
$ $
Income
Subscriptions 19 080 (1)OF
Competition receipts 7 300
cost of prizes 4 100 3 200 (1)
Dinner dance ticket sales 6 500
costs 6 200 300 (1)
22 580
Expenditure
General expenses
(11 500 – 400(1) + 500(1)) 11 600
Irrecoverable debt 80 (1)
Depreciation of equipment
(23 000 + 12 000 – 30 000) 5 000 (1) 16 680
Surplus for the year 5 900 (2)CF/(1)OF
5(c) Advantages 3
Cash received earlier (1)
Reduced risk of irrecoverable subscriptions/reduced risk of subscriptions in arrears (1)
Reduction in administration costs (1)
May encourage new members to join (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)
Disadvantages
Less cash received (1)
Possible reduction in membership (1)
Difficulty of monitoring varying subscription rates (1)
Reduces the surplus for the year (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)
Recommendation (1)
ACCOUNTING 0452/23
Paper 2 Structured Written Paper October/November 2021
1 hour 45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● International accounting terms and formats should be used as appropriate.
● You should show your workings.
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 100.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● Where you are asked to complete a layout, you may not need all the lines for your answer.
DC (DH) 203494/3
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
2
1 Shiv is a trader. His financial year ends on 31 August. He does not maintain a full set of accounting
records but was able to provide the following information for the year ended 31 August 2021.
$ $
Balance b/d 49 000 Expenses 34 000
Cash sales 3 700 Drawings 4 200
Receipts from trade receivables 312 400 Payments to trade payables 257 700
Equipment 16 000
Balance c/d 53 200
365 100 365 100
Shiv had withdrawn $900 for a family holiday during the year. He had included this in the expenses.
On 31 August 2021 Shiv decided to create a provision for doubtful debts of 3% of trade receivables.
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the purchases for the year ended 31 August 2021.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 31 August 2021. The inventory on
31 August 2021 should be clearly shown within the statement.
Shiv
Income Statement for the year ended 31 August 2021
$ $
(c) Name the accounting principle Shiv should apply when recording the $900 he had used for a
family holiday.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
Shiv has always valued his inventory at cost price. He is considering valuing the inventory on
31 August 2021 at selling price as he believes it would result in a higher profit for the year.
REQUIRED
(d) Discuss the implications of Shiv valuing the inventory on 31 August 2021 at selling price.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
2 Jas owns a printing business and has recently incurred various expenditures relating to her
premises.
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the table by inserting a tick (3) to show how each item of expenditure should be
classified. The first one has been completed as an example.
Capital Revenue
expenditure expenditure
[4]
Jas’s business is expanding rapidly and she needs more warehousing space.
Jas can rent an additional warehouse. The rent for the first six months would be $40 000.
Alternatively, Jas can purchase a warehouse for $900 000. She can obtain a long-term loan of
$700 000.
REQUIRED
(b) Advise Jas whether she should rent or purchase a warehouse. Justify your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
An extract from Jas’s statement of financial position at 31 December 2019 showed the following:
During the year ended 31 December 2020 the following transactions took place.
On 30 June 2020 fixtures were sold for $6000, which was received by cheque. These fixtures had
originally been purchased on 1 January 2018 for $20 000.
Jas depreciates fixtures on a straight-line basis. She assumes fixtures will have a useful life of four
years, at which time the residual value will be 10% of original cost. Depreciation is charged for
each part of the year for which the fixtures are owned.
REQUIRED
(c) Prepare the following accounts for the year ended 31 December 2020. Balance each account
and bring down the balance on 1 January 2021.
Jas
Fixtures account
[8]
(d) Prepare the fixtures disposal account for the year ended 31 December 2020.
Jas
Fixtures disposal account
[3]
Workings:
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2021 0452/23/O/N/21 [Turn over
10
3 Anil is a trader. The totals of the trial balance he prepared on 31 December 2020 did not agree.
The debits exceeded the credits by $5140.
2 Sales returns of $520 had been posted as a credit to the purchases account. The correct
entry had been made in the customer’s account.
3 Bank charges of $320 had been correctly entered in the cash book, but had not been entered
in the bank charges account.
4 A cheque refund of $600 for insurance overpaid had been entered on the wrong side of the
bank account and no entry had been made in the insurance account.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare journal entries to correct errors 1 to 4. Narratives are not required.
Anil
Journal
[12]
Anil
Suspense account
[6]
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 20]
4 Karishma runs her own business. The balances in her books on 1 October 2020 included the
following.
$
Insurance account 1700 prepaid
Electricity account 1800 owing
During the financial year ended 30 September 2021 Karishma made the following payments by
cheque.
Insurance payments
$
7 February 2021 3400
13 August 2021 3500
Electricity payments
$
14 October 2020 1800
24 January 2021 1800
26 May 2021 1800
A refund of $300 for insurance overpaid was received by bank transfer on 28 February 2021. The
insurance paid on 13 August 2021 covered a period of five months to 31 December 2021.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the following accounts for the year ended 30 September 2021. Balance the accounts
and bring down the balances on 1 October 2021.
Karishma
Insurance account
Electricity account
[10]
Karishma is considering changing her electricity supplier. The new supplier has offered Karishma
a two-year contract at a fixed monthly amount of $450 payable by direct debit.
REQUIRED
(b) Advise Karishma whether she should change to the new electricity supplier. Justify your
answer with two advantages and two disadvantages of changing supplier.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
On 1 October 2020 Karishma decided to rent out part of her premises to Noor at an annual rent of
$1965.
During the financial year ended 30 September 2021 Noor made the following payments to
Karishma by cheque.
$
1 October 2020 800
2 March 2021 825
8 August 2021 850
The amount received on 8 August 2021 included rent of $510 covering the period 1 October 2021
to 31 December 2021.
REQUIRED
(c) Prepare the rent receivable account for the year ended 30 September 2021. Balance the
account and bring down the balance on 1 October 2021.
Karishma
Rent receivable account
[4]
(d) Identify the section of the statement of financial position at 30 September 2021 in which the
balance on the rent receivable account would appear.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 20]
5 The financial year of VL Sports Club ends on 31 December. The treasurer provided the following
information about receipts and payments for the year ended 31 December 2020.
Receipts $
Subscriptions 19 200
Competition receipts 7 300
Dinner dance ticket sales 6 500
Payments $
Competition prizes 4 100
Dinner dance costs 6 200
Equipment 12 000
General expenses 11 500
Of the subscriptions in arrears on 1 January 2020 an amount of $80 had not been paid by
31 December 2020 and is to be written off as irrecoverable.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 31 December 2020. Balance the
account and bring down the balances on 1 January 2021.
VL Sports Club
Subscriptions account
[8]
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the income and expenditure account for VL Sports Club for the year ended
31 December 2020.
VL Sports Club
Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended 31 December 2020
$ $
The treasurer of VL Sports Club wants to encourage more members to pay their subscriptions in
advance by offering a 10% reduction in annual subscription fees.
(c) Advise the treasurer whether or not VL Sports Club should offer this reduction in annual
subscription fees to members who pay in advance. Justify your answer with one advantage
and one disadvantage.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 20]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
ACCOUNTING 0452/23
Paper 2 October/November 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 100
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2021 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.
These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.
Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond
the scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.
Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.
Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range
may be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).
Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.
a DO credit answers which are worded differently from the mark scheme if they clearly convey the same meaning (unless the mark
scheme requires a specific term)
b DO credit alternative answers/examples which are not written in the mark scheme if they are correct
c DO credit answers where candidates give more than one correct answer in one prompt/numbered/scaffolded space where extended
writing is required rather than list-type answers. For example, questions that require n reasons (e.g. State two reasons …).
d DO NOT credit answers simply for using a ‘key term’ unless that is all that is required. (Check for evidence it is understood and not used
wrongly.)
e DO NOT credit answers which are obviously self-contradicting or trying to cover all possibilities
f DO NOT give further credit for what is effectively repetition of a correct point already credited unless the language itself is being tested.
This applies equally to ‘mirror statements’ (i.e. polluted/not polluted).
g DO NOT require spellings to be correct, unless this is part of the test. However spellings of syllabus terms must allow for clear and
unambiguous separation from other syllabus terms with which they may be confused (e.g. Corrasion/Corrosion)
4 Annotation:
• For point marking, ticks can be used to indicate correct answers and crosses can be used to indicate wrong answers. There is no direct
relationship between ticks and marks. Ticks have no defined meaning for levels of response marking.
• For levels of response marking, the level awarded should be annotated on the script.
• Other annotations will be used by examiners as agreed during standardisation, and the meaning will be understood by all examiners
who marked that paper.
1(a) $ 3
Payments to trade payables 257 700
Less Opening trade payables 32 600 (1)
225 100
Add Closing trade payables 29 600 (1)
Purchases 254 700 (1)
1(b) Shiv 11
Income Statement for the year ended 31 August 2021
$ $
Revenue 320 000 (1)
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 23 500
Purchases 254 700 (1) OF
278 200
Closing inventory 22 200 (2) CF/(1) OF
256 000 (1) OF
Gross profit 64 000 (1)
Expenses (34 000 + 400 (1) – 900 (1)) 33 500
Provision for doubtful debts 777 (1)
Depreciation of equipment
(16 000 – 12 800) 3 200 (1)
37 477
Profit for the year 26 523 (1) OF
1(d) Inventory should be valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value (1) 5
Cost of sales would be understated (1)
The profit will be overstated/profit will not be shown at a realistic level (1)
The current assets/inventory will be overstated (1)
Prudence principle is not being observed (1)
Consistency principle is not being observed (1)
Comparison with previous years/competitors would not be accurate (1)
Accounting records must present a realistic view of the business (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (5)
2(a) 4
Capital Revenue
expenditure expenditure
2(b) 5
Rent warehouse Purchase warehouse
The non-current asset is not owned OR Will own an additional non-current (1)
asset/gets fixed asset/owns a
warehouse
Recommendation (1)
2(c) Jas 8
Fixtures account
2(d) Jas 3
Fixtures disposal account
3(a) Anil 12
Journal
1 Suspense 7100
Sales 7100 (1)
(1)
4 Bank 1200
Suspense 600 (2)
Insurance 600 (1)
OR (1)
Bank 1200
Suspense 1200 (1)
Suspense 600 (1)
Insurance 600 (1)
(1)
3(b) Anil 6
Suspense account
+(1) for matching totals OR for an own figure balance brought down
Any 2 × 1 mark
4(a) Karishma 10
Insurance account
Electricity account
Dates (1)
4(b) Advantages 5
Fixed monthly payment (1)
Payments would be made automatically (1)
More difficult to fall behind with payments (1)
Cheaper than existing contract (1)
Helps with planning expenditure (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Disadvantages
Would lose control of her payment schedule/ would not be able to pick and choose when to make the payments (1)
Bank charges might increase (1)
Tied to two-year contract (1)
Need to consider reliability of new supplier (1)
Possible price increase after two years (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (2)
Recommendation (1)
4(c) Karishma 4
Rent receivable account
Dates (1)
Dates (1)
$ $
Income
Subscriptions 19 080 (1)OF
Competition receipts 7 300
cost of prizes 4 100 3 200 (1)
Dinner dance ticket sales 6 500
costs 6 200 300 (1)
22 580
Expenditure
General expenses
(11 500 – 400(1) + 500(1)) 11 600
Irrecoverable debt 80 (1)
Depreciation of equipment
(23 000 + 12 000 – 30 000) 5 000 (1) 16 680
Surplus for the year 5 900 (2)CF/(1)OF
5(c) Advantages 3
Cash received earlier (1)
Reduced risk of irrecoverable subscriptions/reduced risk of subscriptions in arrears (1)
Reduction in administration costs (1)
May encourage new members to join (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)
Disadvantages
Less cash received (1)
Possible reduction in membership (1)
Difficulty of monitoring varying subscription rates (1)
Reduces the surplus for the year (1)
Accept other valid points
Max (1)
Recommendation (1)